TWI736629B - Manufacturing method of laminated body and manufacturing method of semiconductor element - Google Patents

Manufacturing method of laminated body and manufacturing method of semiconductor element Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWI736629B
TWI736629B TW106118059A TW106118059A TWI736629B TW I736629 B TWI736629 B TW I736629B TW 106118059 A TW106118059 A TW 106118059A TW 106118059 A TW106118059 A TW 106118059A TW I736629 B TWI736629 B TW I736629B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
resin composition
photosensitive resin
metal layer
group
formula
Prior art date
Application number
TW106118059A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TW201835226A (en
Inventor
犬島孝能
福原慶
斯特凡 萬克魯斯特
伊藤勝志
Original Assignee
日商富士軟片股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 日商富士軟片股份有限公司 filed Critical 日商富士軟片股份有限公司
Publication of TW201835226A publication Critical patent/TW201835226A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI736629B publication Critical patent/TWI736629B/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • G03F7/032Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with binders
    • G03F7/037Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with binders the binders being polyamides or polyimides
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L25/00Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof
    • H01L25/03Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof all the devices being of a type provided for in the same subgroup of groups H01L27/00 - H01L33/00, or in a single subclass of H10K, H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes
    • H01L25/04Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof all the devices being of a type provided for in the same subgroup of groups H01L27/00 - H01L33/00, or in a single subclass of H10K, H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes the devices not having separate containers
    • H01L25/07Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof all the devices being of a type provided for in the same subgroup of groups H01L27/00 - H01L33/00, or in a single subclass of H10K, H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes the devices not having separate containers the devices being of a type provided for in group H01L29/00
    • H01L25/073Apertured devices mounted on one or more rods passed through the apertures
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/20Exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/26Processing photosensitive materials; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/38Treatment before imagewise removal, e.g. prebaking
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/26Processing photosensitive materials; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/40Treatment after imagewise removal, e.g. baking
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L25/00Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof
    • H01L25/03Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof all the devices being of a type provided for in the same subgroup of groups H01L27/00 - H01L33/00, or in a single subclass of H10K, H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes
    • H01L25/04Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof all the devices being of a type provided for in the same subgroup of groups H01L27/00 - H01L33/00, or in a single subclass of H10K, H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes the devices not having separate containers
    • H01L25/065Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof all the devices being of a type provided for in the same subgroup of groups H01L27/00 - H01L33/00, or in a single subclass of H10K, H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes the devices not having separate containers the devices being of a type provided for in group H01L27/00
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L25/00Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof
    • H01L25/03Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof all the devices being of a type provided for in the same subgroup of groups H01L27/00 - H01L33/00, or in a single subclass of H10K, H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes
    • H01L25/04Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof all the devices being of a type provided for in the same subgroup of groups H01L27/00 - H01L33/00, or in a single subclass of H10K, H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes the devices not having separate containers
    • H01L25/065Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof all the devices being of a type provided for in the same subgroup of groups H01L27/00 - H01L33/00, or in a single subclass of H10K, H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes the devices not having separate containers the devices being of a type provided for in group H01L27/00
    • H01L25/0657Stacked arrangements of devices
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L25/00Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof
    • H01L25/03Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof all the devices being of a type provided for in the same subgroup of groups H01L27/00 - H01L33/00, or in a single subclass of H10K, H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes
    • H01L25/04Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof all the devices being of a type provided for in the same subgroup of groups H01L27/00 - H01L33/00, or in a single subclass of H10K, H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes the devices not having separate containers
    • H01L25/07Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof all the devices being of a type provided for in the same subgroup of groups H01L27/00 - H01L33/00, or in a single subclass of H10K, H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes the devices not having separate containers the devices being of a type provided for in group H01L29/00
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L25/00Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof
    • H01L25/18Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof the devices being of types provided for in two or more different subgroups of the same main group of groups H01L27/00 - H01L33/00, or in a single subclass of H10K, H10N
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L2224/00Indexing scheme for arrangements for connecting or disconnecting semiconductor or solid-state bodies and methods related thereto as covered by H01L24/00
    • H01L2224/01Means for bonding being attached to, or being formed on, the surface to be connected, e.g. chip-to-package, die-attach, "first-level" interconnects; Manufacturing methods related thereto
    • H01L2224/10Bump connectors; Manufacturing methods related thereto
    • H01L2224/15Structure, shape, material or disposition of the bump connectors after the connecting process
    • H01L2224/16Structure, shape, material or disposition of the bump connectors after the connecting process of an individual bump connector
    • H01L2224/161Disposition
    • H01L2224/16135Disposition the bump connector connecting between different semiconductor or solid-state bodies, i.e. chip-to-chip
    • H01L2224/16145Disposition the bump connector connecting between different semiconductor or solid-state bodies, i.e. chip-to-chip the bodies being stacked
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L2224/00Indexing scheme for arrangements for connecting or disconnecting semiconductor or solid-state bodies and methods related thereto as covered by H01L24/00
    • H01L2224/73Means for bonding being of different types provided for in two or more of groups H01L2224/10, H01L2224/18, H01L2224/26, H01L2224/34, H01L2224/42, H01L2224/50, H01L2224/63, H01L2224/71
    • H01L2224/732Location after the connecting process
    • H01L2224/73201Location after the connecting process on the same surface
    • H01L2224/73203Bump and layer connectors
    • H01L2224/73204Bump and layer connectors the bump connector being embedded into the layer connector

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Power Engineering (AREA)
  • Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
  • Laminated Bodies (AREA)
  • Macromolecular Compounds Obtained By Forming Nitrogen-Containing Linkages In General (AREA)
  • Exposure And Positioning Against Photoresist Photosensitive Materials (AREA)
  • Exposure Of Semiconductors, Excluding Electron Or Ion Beam Exposure (AREA)
  • Photosensitive Polymer And Photoresist Processing (AREA)
  • Physical Vapour Deposition (AREA)
  • Internal Circuitry In Semiconductor Integrated Circuit Devices (AREA)
  • Formation Of Insulating Films (AREA)

Abstract

一種積層體的製造方法,其包括依序進行之如下製程:感光性樹脂組成物層形成製程,將感光性樹脂組成物應用於基板而形成為層狀;曝光製程,對應用於基板之感光性樹脂組成物層進行曝光;顯影處理製程,對所曝光之感光性樹脂組成物層進行顯影處理;硬化製程,對顯影後的感光性樹脂組成物層進行硬化;及金屬層形成製程,藉由氣相成膜於硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的表面形成金屬層,形成金屬層時的硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的溫度低於硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的玻璃化轉變溫度。 A method for manufacturing a laminate includes the following processes in sequence: a photosensitive resin composition layer forming process, applying the photosensitive resin composition to a substrate to form a layer; an exposure process corresponding to the photosensitive resin composition used in the substrate The resin composition layer is exposed; the development process is to develop the exposed photosensitive resin composition layer; the curing process is to harden the developed photosensitive resin composition layer; and the metal layer formation process is used by air The phase film is formed on the surface of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process to form a metal layer. The temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process when the metal layer is formed is lower than that of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process. Glass transition temperature.

Description

積層體的製造方法及半導體元件的製造方法 Manufacturing method of laminated body and manufacturing method of semiconductor element

本發明是有關於一種積層體的製造方法、半導體元件的製造方法及積層體。 The present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a laminate, a method for manufacturing a semiconductor element, and a laminate.

聚醯亞胺樹脂或聚苯并噁唑樹脂等樹脂的耐熱性及絶縁性優異,因此使用於半導體元件的絕緣層等中。 Resins such as polyimide resins and polybenzoxazole resins are excellent in heat resistance and insulation properties, and therefore are used in insulating layers of semiconductor elements and the like.

[先前技術文獻] [Prior Technical Literature]

[專利文獻] [Patent Literature]

專利文獻1:國際公開WO2011/034092號公報 Patent Document 1: International Publication No. WO2011/034092

正在進行如下,亦即作為半導體元件的再配線層用層間絶縁膜使用聚醯亞胺樹脂或聚苯并噁唑樹脂等耐熱性及絶縁性優異之樹脂的硬化膜,且積層該硬化膜和金屬層而製造半導體元件的再配線層。 As the interlayer insulation film for the rewiring layer of the semiconductor element, a cured film of a resin excellent in heat resistance and insulation such as polyimide resin or polybenzoxazole resin is used, and the cured film and metal are laminated Layer to manufacture the rewiring layer of the semiconductor element.

本發明人等對積層聚醯亞胺樹脂或聚苯并噁唑樹脂等耐熱性及絶縁性優異之樹脂的硬化膜和金屬層之情況進行研究之結果,得知硬化膜與金屬層的黏附性不夠充分,且於硬化膜與金屬層之間產生層間剝離。 The inventors of the present invention conducted research on the cured film and metal layer of a resin with excellent heat resistance and insulation such as polyimide resin or polybenzoxazole resin, and found that the adhesion between the cured film and the metal layer It is not sufficient, and interlayer peeling occurs between the cured film and the metal layer.

於此,通常於使用於半導體元件的製作中之成膜方法中,於基板與包括銅(Cu)等之配線層之間設置阻擋金屬膜,藉此可防止構成配線層之材料擴散於基板而引起之配線的劣化(參閱專利文獻1)。 Here, in the film forming method used in the manufacture of semiconductor elements, a barrier metal film is usually provided between the substrate and the wiring layer including copper (Cu), etc., thereby preventing the material constituting the wiring layer from diffusing on the substrate. Deterioration of the wiring caused by it (see Patent Document 1).

專利文獻1中記載有阻擋金屬膜的形成方法,其中準備於表面形成有微細的孔或槽之基板,於將基板的溫度設為150℃以上且500℃以下的範圍之狀態下,於基板上形成包括鈦或鈦化合物之阻擋金屬膜。依專利文獻1中,記載有如下,亦即藉由使用上述結構的阻擋金屬膜的形成方法,相對於高縱橫比的圖案等,能夠減少於開口部產生懸垂(開口部的直徑變得比底部小之情況)。 然而,專利文獻1中,只關注了作為基板而於矽晶圓的表面形成有矽氧化物膜之情況。亦即,專利文獻1中,只關注了積層有聚醯亞胺樹脂或聚苯并噁唑樹脂等耐熱性及絶縁性優異之樹脂的硬化膜和金屬層之情況下的層間剝離。Patent Document 1 describes a method for forming a barrier metal film, in which a substrate with fine holes or grooves formed on the surface is prepared, and the temperature of the substrate is set in the range of 150°C or higher and 500°C or lower on the substrate. A barrier metal film including titanium or titanium compound is formed. According to Patent Document 1, it is described that by using the barrier metal film formation method of the above-mentioned structure, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of sag in the opening (the diameter of the opening becomes larger than the bottom Small case). However, in Patent Document 1, attention is only paid to the case where a silicon oxide film is formed on the surface of a silicon wafer as a substrate. That is, in Patent Document 1, only attention has been paid to interlaminar peeling when a cured film and a metal layer are laminated with a resin excellent in heat resistance and insulation, such as polyimide resin or polybenzoxazole resin.

本發明欲解決之課題在於提供一種能夠抑制積層有基板、硬化膜及金屬層時的層間剝離之積層體的製造方法。又,本發明欲解決之課題在於提供一種包括積層體的製造方法之半導體元件的製造方法。又,本發明欲解決之課題在於提供一種能夠抑制積層有基板、硬化膜及金屬層時的層間剝離之積層體。The problem to be solved by the present invention is to provide a method of manufacturing a laminate that can suppress delamination when a substrate, a cured film, and a metal layer are laminated. In addition, the problem to be solved by the present invention is to provide a method of manufacturing a semiconductor element including a method of manufacturing a laminate. In addition, the problem to be solved by the present invention is to provide a laminate that can suppress delamination when a substrate, a cured film, and a metal layer are laminated.

本發明人對上述課題進行研究之結果,發現於低於聚醯亞胺樹脂或聚苯并噁唑樹脂等耐熱性及絶縁性優異之樹脂的硬化膜的玻璃化轉變溫度下,使用濺射法等氣相成膜而形成金屬層,藉此可解決上述課題。 作為用於解決上述課題之方法之本發明及本發明的優選態樣如下。 [1]一種積層體的製造方法,其包括依序進行之如下製程: 感光性樹脂組成物層形成製程,將感光性樹脂組成物應用於基板而形成為層狀; 曝光製程,對應用於基板之感光性樹脂組成物層進行曝光; 顯影處理製程,對所曝光之感光性樹脂組成物層進行顯影處理; 硬化製程,對顯影後的感光性樹脂組成物層進行硬化;以及 金屬層形成製程,藉由氣相成膜於硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的表面形成金屬層;並且 形成前述金屬層時的硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的溫度低於硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的玻璃化轉變溫度。 [2]如[1]所述之積層體的製造方法,其還包括再次依序進行之感光性樹脂組成物層形成製程、曝光製程、顯影處理製程、硬化製程及金屬層形成製程。 [3]如[1]或[2]所述之積層體的製造方法,感光性樹脂組成物藉由曝光構建交聯結構而針對有機溶劑的溶解度降低。 [4]如[1]~[3]中任一項所述之積層體的製造方法,感光性樹脂組成物包括選自聚醯亞胺前驅物、聚醯亞胺、聚苯并噁唑前驅物及聚苯并噁唑中之至少一種樹脂。 [5]如[1]~[4]中任一項所述之積層體的製造方法,其還包括第2金屬層形成製程,於金屬層的表面形成第2金屬層。 [6]如[5]中所述之積層體的製造方法,第2金屬層包括銅。 [7]如[1]~[6]中任一項所述之積層體的製造方法,金屬層包含如下化合物中的至少一種,該化合物包含鈦、鉭及銅以及它們中的至少一種。 [8]如[1]~[7]中任一項所述之積層體的製造方法,於金屬層形成製程中形成之金屬層的厚度為50~2000nm。 [9]如[1]~[8]中任一項所述之積層體的製造方法,依照雷射測量法測定之硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物的殘留應力小於35MPa。 [10]如[1]~[9]中任一項所述之積層體的製造方法,感光性樹脂組成物為負型顯影用感光性樹脂組成物。 [11]如[1]~[10]中任一項所述之積層體的製造方法,硬化製程包括對感光性樹脂組成物層進行升溫之升溫製程和以與升溫製程的最終到達溫度相等之保持溫度進行保持之保持製程, 保持製程中的保持溫度為250℃以下。 [12]如[1]~[11]中任一項所述之積層體的製造方法,形成金屬層時的感光性樹脂組成物層的溫度比感光性樹脂組成物層的玻璃化轉變溫度低30℃以上。 [13]一種半導體元件的製造方法,其包括[1]~[12]中任一項所述之積層體的製造方法。 [14]一種積層體,其具有基板、圖案硬化膜及位於前述圖案硬化膜的表面之金屬層, 圖案硬化膜包含聚醯亞胺或聚苯并噁唑, 構成位於圖案硬化膜的表面之金屬層之金屬針對圖案硬化膜的侵入長度距離圖案硬化膜的表面為130nm以下。As a result of the inventors’ research on the above-mentioned problems, they found that the sputtering method is used at a temperature lower than the glass transition temperature of a cured film of a resin excellent in heat resistance and insulation, such as polyimide resin or polybenzoxazole resin. The above-mentioned problems can be solved by forming a metal layer by forming a film in a vapor phase. The present invention as a method for solving the above-mentioned problems and preferred aspects of the present invention are as follows. [1] A method of manufacturing a laminate, which includes the following processes in sequence: a photosensitive resin composition layer forming process, applying the photosensitive resin composition to a substrate to form a layer; an exposure process corresponding to the substrate The photosensitive resin composition layer is exposed; the development process is to develop the exposed photosensitive resin composition layer; the curing process is to harden the developed photosensitive resin composition layer; and the metal layer formation process, A metal layer is formed on the surface of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process by vapor phase film formation; and the temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process when forming the metal layer is lower than the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process The glass transition temperature of the resin composition layer. [2] The method of manufacturing a laminate as described in [1], which further includes a photosensitive resin composition layer forming process, an exposure process, a development process, a hardening process, and a metal layer forming process that are performed in sequence again. [3] In the method for producing a laminate as described in [1] or [2], the photosensitive resin composition constructs a cross-linked structure by exposure to light, and its solubility in an organic solvent is reduced. [4] The method for producing a laminate according to any one of [1] to [3], wherein the photosensitive resin composition includes a precursor selected from the group consisting of a polyimide precursor, a polyimide, and a polybenzoxazole precursor At least one of resin and polybenzoxazole. [5] The method of manufacturing a laminate according to any one of [1] to [4], further comprising a second metal layer forming process for forming a second metal layer on the surface of the metal layer. [6] The method of manufacturing a laminate as described in [5], wherein the second metal layer includes copper. [7] The method for producing a laminate according to any one of [1] to [6], wherein the metal layer contains at least one of the following compounds, and the compound contains at least one of titanium, tantalum, and copper. [8] The method for producing a laminate according to any one of [1] to [7], wherein the thickness of the metal layer formed in the metal layer forming process is 50 to 2000 nm. [9] In the method for manufacturing a laminate as described in any one of [1] to [8], the residual stress of the photosensitive resin composition after the curing process measured in accordance with the laser measurement method is less than 35 MPa. [10] The method for producing a laminate according to any one of [1] to [9], wherein the photosensitive resin composition is a photosensitive resin composition for negative development. [11] The method for manufacturing a laminate as described in any one of [1] to [10], wherein the curing process includes a temperature-rising process of raising the temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer and a temperature equal to the final temperature of the temperature-rising process. The holding temperature is maintained during the holding process, and the holding temperature in the process is kept below 250°C. [12] The method for producing a laminate according to any one of [1] to [11], wherein the temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer when the metal layer is formed is lower than the glass transition temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer Above 30°C. [13] A method of manufacturing a semiconductor element, comprising the method of manufacturing a laminate according to any one of [1] to [12]. [14] A laminate having a substrate, a patterned hardened film, and a metal layer on the surface of the aforementioned patterned hardened film, the patterned hardened film includes polyimide or polybenzoxazole, and forms the metal on the surface of the patterned hardened film The penetration length of the metal of the layer into the patterned cured film is 130 nm or less from the surface of the patterned cured film.

[15]一種積層體,藉由[1]~[12]中任一項所述之積層體的製造方法而製造。 [16]一種半導體元件,藉由[13]所述之半導體元件的製造方法而製作。 [發明效果][15] A laminate produced by the method for producing a laminate according to any one of [1] to [12]. [16] A semiconductor device manufactured by the method of manufacturing a semiconductor device described in [13]. [Effects of the invention]

依本發明,能夠提供一種能夠抑制積層有基板、硬化膜及金屬層時的層間剝離之積層體的製造方法。又,依本發明,能夠提供一種包括本發明的積層體的製造方法之半導體元件的製造方法。又,依本發明,能夠提供一種能夠抑制積層有基板、硬化膜及金屬層時的層間剝離之積層體。 【圖示簡單說明】According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a method of manufacturing a laminate that can suppress delamination when a substrate, a cured film, and a metal layer are laminated. Furthermore, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a method of manufacturing a semiconductor element including the method of manufacturing a laminate of the present invention. Furthermore, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a laminate that can suppress delamination when the substrate, the cured film, and the metal layer are laminated. [Illustration brief description]

圖1是表示半導體元件的一實施方式的結構之示意圖。 圖2是表示藉由本發明的積層體的製造方法而得到之積層體的一實施方式的結構之示意圖。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of an embodiment of a semiconductor element. Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of an embodiment of a laminate obtained by the method of manufacturing a laminate of the present invention.

以下所記載之本發明中的構成要件的說明有時基於本發明的代表性實施方式而進行,但本發明並不限定於該種實施方式。 關於本說明書中的基團(原子團)的標記,未記錄經取代及未經取代之標記是同時包括不具有取代基者和具有取代基者。例如,「烷基」不僅包含不具有取代基之烷基(未經取代的烷基),還包含具有取代基之烷基(取代烷基)。 本說明書中「曝光」只要無特別限定,除了利用光的曝光以外,利用電子束、離子束等粒子束之描繪亦包含於曝光中。又,作為使用於曝光之光,通常可列舉以水銀燈的明線光譜、準分子雷射為代表之遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X射線、電子束等活性光線或放射線。 本說明書中,利用「~」表示之數值範圍是指將記載於「~」前後之數值作為下限值及上限值而包含之範圍。 本說明書中,「(甲基)丙烯酸酯」表示「丙烯酸酯」及「甲基丙烯酸酯」這兩者或任一個,「(甲基)烯丙基」表示「烯丙基」及「甲基烯丙基」這兩者或任一個,「(甲基)丙烯酸」表示「丙烯酸」及「甲基丙烯酸」這兩者或任一個,「(甲基)丙烯醯基」表示「丙烯醯基」及「甲基丙烯醯基」這兩者或任一個。 本說明書中,「製程」這一術語,不僅是獨立的製程,而且即使於能夠與其他製程明確區分之情況下,若可實現對該製程所期待之作用,則亦包含於本術語中。 本說明書中,固體成分濃度是相對於組成物的總質量中除了溶劑以外的成分的質量百分率。又,只要沒有特別記載,則固體成分濃度是指25℃下的濃度。 本說明書中,只要沒有特別記載,則重量平均分子量(Mw)及數量平均分子量(Mn)基於凝膠滲透層析法(GPC測定)之苯乙烯換算值而定義。本說明書中,重量平均分子量(Mw)及數量平均分子量(Mn)例如能夠利用HLC-8220(TOSOH CORPORATION製),並作為柱而使用保護柱HZ-L、TSKgel Super HZM-M、TSKgel Super HZ4000、TSKgel Super HZ3000、TSKgel Super HZ2000(TOSOH CORPORATION製)而求出。只要沒有特別記載,則將洗提液設為利用THF(四氫呋喃)測定者。又,只要沒有特別記載,則將檢測設為使用UV線(紫外線)的波長254nm檢測器者。The description of the constituent elements in the present invention described below may be performed based on a representative embodiment of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. Regarding the label of the group (atomic group) in this specification, the label that does not record substituted and unsubstituted includes both those that do not have a substituent and those that have a substituent. For example, "alkyl" includes not only unsubstituted alkyl (unsubstituted alkyl) but also substituted alkyl (substituted alkyl). As long as "exposure" in this specification is not particularly limited, in addition to exposure with light, drawing with particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams is also included in exposure. In addition, as the light used for exposure, active rays or radiations such as extreme ultraviolet, extreme ultraviolet (EUV light), X-rays, electron beams, etc. represented by the bright-ray spectrum of mercury lamps and excimer lasers are usually cited. In this specification, the numerical range indicated by "~" refers to the range that includes the numerical values described before and after "~" as the lower limit and the upper limit. In this manual, "(meth)acrylate" means either or both of "acrylate" and "methacrylate", and "(meth)allyl" means "allyl" and "methyl "Allyl" means both or either, "(meth)acrylic acid" means both or either of "acrylic acid" and "methacrylic acid", "(meth)acrylic acid" means "acrylic acid" And either or both of "methacryloyl". In this manual, the term "process" is not only an independent process, but even if it can be clearly distinguished from other processes, if the desired effect of the process can be achieved, it is also included in this term. In this specification, the solid content concentration is the mass percentage of components other than the solvent in the total mass of the composition. In addition, unless otherwise stated, the solid content concentration means the concentration at 25°C. In this specification, unless otherwise stated, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) are defined based on the styrene conversion value of gel permeation chromatography (GPC measurement). In this specification, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) can be, for example, HLC-8220 (manufactured by TOSOH CORPORATION), and guard columns HZ-L, TSKgel Super HZM-M, TSKgel Super HZ4000, TSKgel Super HZ3000, TSKgel Super HZ2000 (manufactured by TOSOH CORPORATION). Unless otherwise stated, the eluent is measured with THF (tetrahydrofuran). In addition, as long as there is no special description, the detection is to use a UV ray (ultraviolet) wavelength 254 nm detector.

本發明的積層體的製造方法包括依序進行之如下製程: 感光性樹脂組成物層形成製程,將感光性樹脂組成物應用於基板而形成為層狀; 曝光製程,對應用於基板之感光性樹脂組成物層進行曝光; 顯影處理製程,對所曝光之感光性樹脂組成物層進行顯影處理; 硬化製程,對顯影後的感光性樹脂組成物層進行硬化;及 金屬層形成製程,藉由氣相成膜於硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的表面形成金屬層, 形成前述金屬層時的硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的溫度低於硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的玻璃化轉變溫度。 藉由上述結構,能夠抑制積層有基板、硬化膜及金屬層時的層間剝離。 藉由濺射法等的氣相成膜於基板上的硬化膜(硬化膜是指硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層)的表面形成金屬層時,通常為了控制金屬層的膜質而對基板(及硬化膜)進行加熱。以往,若於較高的溫度下使用濺射法而形成金屬層,則能夠將金屬原子打入硬化膜,作為其結果推定能夠抑制產生層間剝離。 實際上,本發明人等利用透射型電子顯微鏡(Transmission Electron Microscope;TEM)等對使用濺射法於硬化膜的表面形成有金屬層之積層體的截面進行分析之結果,得知若於較高的溫度下使用濺射法形成金屬層,則產生金屬滲透硬化膜的表面之現象(penetration)。然而,得知若於較高的溫度下使用濺射法而形成金屬層,則產生積層有基板、硬化膜及金屬層時的層間剝離。 另一方面,得知藉由以將硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的溫度(硬化膜的表面的溫度)抑制為低於玻璃化轉變溫度的方式藉由濺射法等氣相成膜而形成金屬層,無金屬滲透硬化膜的表面之現象(penetration),進而還未產生積層有基板、硬化膜及金屬層時的層間剝離。以下,將玻璃化轉變溫度稱為Tg(glass transition temperature)。 以下,對本發明的較佳的態樣進行詳細說明。The manufacturing method of the laminated body of the present invention includes the following processes in sequence: a photosensitive resin composition layer forming process, applying the photosensitive resin composition to a substrate to form a layer; an exposure process corresponding to the photosensitive for the substrate The resin composition layer is exposed; the development process is to develop the exposed photosensitive resin composition layer; the curing process is to harden the developed photosensitive resin composition layer; and the metal layer formation process is used by air A metal layer is formed on the surface of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process, and the temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process when forming the metal layer is lower than that of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process The glass transition temperature. With the above structure, it is possible to suppress delamination when the substrate, the cured film, and the metal layer are laminated. When a metal layer is formed on the surface of the cured film (the cured film refers to the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process) formed on the substrate by a vapor phase such as sputtering method, the substrate is usually controlled in order to control the film quality of the metal layer. (And hardened film) to heat. Conventionally, if a metal layer is formed using a sputtering method at a relatively high temperature, metal atoms can be driven into the cured film. As a result, it is estimated that the generation of delamination can be suppressed. In fact, the inventors of the present invention analyzed the cross section of a laminate with a metal layer formed on the surface of the cured film using a sputtering method using a transmission electron microscope (Transmission Electron Microscope; TEM), etc., and found that Sputtering is used to form a metal layer at a temperature of 90°C, and penetration of the metal into the surface of the hardened film occurs. However, it is known that if the metal layer is formed by using the sputtering method at a relatively high temperature, delamination occurs when the substrate, the cured film, and the metal layer are laminated. On the other hand, it is known that the temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process (the temperature of the surface of the cured film) is suppressed to be lower than the glass transition temperature by vapor phase film formation such as sputtering. When the metal layer is formed, there is no penetration of the metal into the surface of the hardened film, and no delamination occurs when the substrate, hardened film, and metal layer are laminated. Hereinafter, the glass transition temperature is referred to as Tg (glass transition temperature). Hereinafter, the preferred aspects of the present invention will be described in detail.

<過濾製程> 本發明的積層體的製造方法可以包括於將感光性樹脂組成物應用於基板之前,對感光性樹脂組成物進行過濾之製程。過濾使用濾波器進行為較佳。作為濾波器的孔徑,1μm以下為較佳,0.5μm以下為更佳,0.1μm以下為進一步較佳。作為濾波器的材質,聚四氟乙烯製、聚乙烯製、尼龍製濾波器為較佳。濾波器可以使用以有機溶劑預先清洗者。濾波器過濾製程中,可以將複數種濾波器串聯或並聯而使用。當使用複數種濾波器時,可以組合使用孔徑和/或材質不同之濾波器。又,可以使用各種材料而進行複數次過濾,且進行複數次過濾之製程可以是循環過濾製程。又,可以進行加壓過濾,加壓過濾時的施加之壓力是0.05MPa以上且0.3MPa以下為較佳。 除了使用濾波器進行過濾以外,亦可以使用吸附材料來進行過濾而去除雜質,亦可以組合使用濾波器過濾和吸附材料而進行過濾。作為吸附材料,能夠使用公知的吸附材料,例如能夠使用矽膠、沸石等無機系吸附材料、活性碳等有機系吸附材料。<Filtration Process> The method of manufacturing the laminate of the present invention may include a process of filtering the photosensitive resin composition before applying the photosensitive resin composition to the substrate. It is better to use filters for filtering. The aperture of the filter is preferably 1 μm or less, more preferably 0.5 μm or less, and even more preferably 0.1 μm or less. As the material of the filter, a filter made of polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene, or nylon is preferable. The filter can be cleaned in advance with an organic solvent. In the filter filtering process, multiple filters can be used in series or in parallel. When multiple filters are used, filters with different apertures and/or materials can be used in combination. In addition, various materials can be used to perform multiple filtrations, and the process for performing multiple filtrations may be a cyclic filtration process. In addition, pressure filtration can be performed, and the pressure applied during pressure filtration is preferably 0.05 MPa or more and 0.3 MPa or less. In addition to filtering with a filter, an adsorbent can also be used for filtering to remove impurities, or a combination of filter filtering and adsorbent can be used for filtering. As the adsorbent, well-known adsorbents can be used. For example, inorganic adsorbents such as silica gel and zeolite, and organic adsorbents such as activated carbon can be used.

<<感光性樹脂組成物層形成製程>> 本發明的積層體的製造方法包括將感光性樹脂組成物應用於基板而形成為層狀之感光性樹脂組成物層形成製程。 作為應用於基板之方法,塗佈為較佳。 具體而言,作為應用方法,可例示浸塗法、氣刀塗佈法、簾式塗佈法、線棒塗佈法、凹版塗佈法、擠壓塗佈法、噴塗法、旋塗法、狹縫塗佈法及噴墨法等。從感光性樹脂組成物層的厚度的均勻性的觀點考慮,旋塗法、狹縫塗佈法、噴塗法、噴墨法為更佳。依應用方法調整適當的固體成分濃度或塗佈條件,藉此能夠得到所希望的感光性樹脂組成物層。又,能夠依基板的形狀適當選擇塗佈方法,只要為晶圓等圓形基板,則旋塗法或噴塗法、噴墨法等為較佳,且只要為矩形基板,則狹縫塗佈法或噴塗法、噴墨法等為較佳。利用旋塗法時,例如,能夠以500~2000rpm(每分鐘轉數(revolutions per minute)轉速應用10秒鐘~1分鐘左右。 關於感光性樹脂組成物層(硬化製程後的硬化膜)的厚度,於曝光後,以成為0.1~100μm之方式進行塗佈為較佳,以成為1~50μm之方式進行塗佈為更佳。又,如圖2所示,所形成之感光性樹脂組成物層的厚度無需一定均勻。尤其,於凹凸的表面上設置感光性樹脂組成物層時,如圖2所示,應可得到厚度不同之硬化膜。尤其將硬化膜積層複數層時,作為凹部,還可形成深度較深的凹部,但本發明相對於該種結構,於能夠更加有效地抑制層間的剝離的方面技術價值較高。當積層體具有厚度不同之硬化膜時,最薄部分的硬化膜的厚度為上述厚度為較佳。<<Photosensitive resin composition layer formation process>> The manufacturing method of the laminate of the present invention includes a photosensitive resin composition layer formation process in which a photosensitive resin composition is applied to a substrate to form a layer. As a method to be applied to the substrate, coating is preferred. Specifically, as the application method, there can be exemplified dip coating method, air knife coating method, curtain coating method, wire bar coating method, gravure coating method, extrusion coating method, spray coating method, spin coating method, Slit coating method and inkjet method, etc. From the viewpoint of the uniformity of the thickness of the photosensitive resin composition layer, a spin coating method, a slit coating method, a spray coating method, and an inkjet method are more preferable. By adjusting the appropriate solid content concentration or coating conditions according to the application method, the desired photosensitive resin composition layer can be obtained. In addition, the coating method can be appropriately selected according to the shape of the substrate. As long as it is a circular substrate such as a wafer, spin coating, spray coating, inkjet, etc. are preferred, and as long as it is a rectangular substrate, the slit coating method Or spraying method, inkjet method, etc. are preferable. When using the spin coating method, for example, it can be applied at 500 to 2000 rpm (revolutions per minute) for about 10 seconds to 1 minute. Regarding the thickness of the photosensitive resin composition layer (cured film after the curing process) After the exposure, it is preferable to apply the coating so that it becomes 0.1-100μm, and it is more preferable to apply the coating so that it becomes 1-50μm. Also, as shown in Figure 2, the formed photosensitive resin composition layer The thickness does not need to be uniform. In particular, when the photosensitive resin composition layer is provided on the uneven surface, as shown in Figure 2, cured films with different thicknesses should be obtained. Especially when multiple layers of the cured film are laminated, the recesses are also Deep recesses can be formed, but compared with this structure, the present invention has a higher technical value in that it can more effectively inhibit delamination between layers. When the laminate has cured films with different thicknesses, the thinnest part of the cured film The thickness of is preferably the above-mentioned thickness.

<<基板>> 基板的種類能夠依用途適當設定,矽、氮化矽、聚矽、氧化矽、非晶矽等半導體製造用基板、石英、玻璃、光學膜、陶瓷材料、氣相沉積膜、磁性膜、反射膜、Ni、Cu、Cr、Fe等金屬基板、紙、SOG(Spin On Glass)、TFT(thin film transistor;薄膜電晶體)陣列基板、等離子顯示面板(PDP)的電極板等並無特別限制。本發明中,尤其半導體製造用基板為較佳,矽為更佳。 又,當於硬化膜的表面或金屬層的表面形成感光性樹脂組成物層時,可以將硬化膜或金屬層用作基板。<<Substrate>> The type of substrate can be appropriately set according to the application, silicon, silicon nitride, polysilicon, silicon oxide, amorphous silicon and other semiconductor manufacturing substrates, quartz, glass, optical films, ceramic materials, vapor-deposited films, Magnetic film, reflective film, Ni, Cu, Cr, Fe and other metal substrates, paper, SOG (Spin On Glass), TFT (thin film transistor) array substrate, plasma display panel (PDP) electrode plate, etc. There are no special restrictions. In the present invention, a substrate for semiconductor manufacturing is particularly preferable, and silicon is more preferable. In addition, when the photosensitive resin composition layer is formed on the surface of the cured film or the surface of the metal layer, the cured film or the metal layer can be used as a substrate.

<<感光性樹脂組成物>> 以下,對本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物進行詳細說明。 本發明的積層體的製造方法中,感光性樹脂組成物包含藉由曝光而形成交聯結構之化合物為較佳,是負型顯影用為更佳,藉由曝光而構建交聯結構來降低針對有機溶劑的溶解度為特佳,用有機溶劑進行顯影之負型感光性樹脂為最佳。 首先,對本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物可以含有之成分進行說明。感光性樹脂組成物可以包含該些以外的成分,但並不將該些成分作為必要成分。<<Photosensitive resin composition>> Hereinafter, the photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention will be described in detail. In the manufacturing method of the laminate of the present invention, the photosensitive resin composition preferably contains a compound that forms a cross-linked structure by exposure, and it is more preferable for negative-type development. The cross-linked structure is constructed by exposure to reduce the resistance The solubility of organic solvents is particularly good, and negative photosensitive resins developed with organic solvents are the best. First, the components that can be contained in the photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention will be described. The photosensitive resin composition may contain components other than these, but these components are not essential components.

<<<樹脂>>> 本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物包含樹脂。 本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物中,樹脂並無特別限制,能夠使用公知的樹脂。樹脂是高耐熱性樹脂為較佳。<<<Resin>>> The photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention contains a resin. In the photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention, the resin is not particularly limited, and a known resin can be used. The resin is preferably a resin with high heat resistance.

本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物包含選自聚醯亞胺前驅物、聚醯亞胺、聚苯并噁唑前驅物及聚苯并噁唑中之至少一種樹脂為較佳。本發明的積層體的製造方法中,感光性樹脂組成物包含聚醯亞胺前驅物或聚苯并噁唑前驅物為更佳,包含聚醯亞胺前驅物為進一步較佳。The photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention preferably contains at least one resin selected from the group consisting of polyimide precursor, polyimide, polybenzoxazole precursor, and polybenzoxazole. In the manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention, it is more preferable that the photosensitive resin composition contains a polyimide precursor or a polybenzoxazole precursor, and it is more preferable that it contains a polyimide precursor.

本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物可以僅包含選自聚醯亞胺前驅物、聚醯亞胺、聚苯并噁唑前驅物及聚苯并噁唑中之一種,亦可以包含兩種以上。又,可以包含兩種等聚醯亞胺前驅物,亦即可以包含種類相同,且結構不同之兩種以上的樹脂。 本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物中的樹脂的含量是感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分的10~99質量%為較佳,50~98質量%為更佳,70~96質量%為進一步較佳。The photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention may contain only one selected from the group consisting of polyimide precursor, polyimide, polybenzoxazole precursor, and polybenzoxazole, or two above. In addition, two or more polyimide precursors may be included, that is, two or more resins of the same type and different structures may be included. The content of the resin in the photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention is preferably 10 to 99% by mass of the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition, more preferably 50 to 98% by mass, and 70 to 96% by mass To be further preferred.

進而,樹脂包含聚合性基為較佳。 又,感光性樹脂組成物包含聚合性化合物為較佳。藉由這種結構,於曝光部形成三維網絡而成為牢固的交聯膜,感光性樹脂組成物層(硬化膜)不會因後述的表面活化處理而受到損傷,且藉由表面活化處理,硬化膜與金屬層的黏附性或硬化膜彼此的黏附性更有效地提高。 此外,樹脂包含由-Ar-L-Ar-表示之部分結構為較佳。其中,Ar分別獨立地為芳香族基,L是可以由氟原子取代之碳數1~10的脂肪族烴基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO2 -或-NHCO-及包括上述中的兩個以上的組合之基團。藉由這種結構,感光性樹脂組成物層(硬化膜)成為柔軟的結構,並更有效地發揮抑制層間剝離的產生之效果。Ar是伸苯基為較佳,L是可以由氟原子取代之碳數1或2的脂肪族烴基、-O-、-CO-、-S-或-SO2 -為進一步較佳。其中,脂肪族烴基是伸烷基為較佳。Furthermore, it is preferable that the resin contains a polymerizable group. Moreover, it is preferable that the photosensitive resin composition contains a polymerizable compound. With this structure, a three-dimensional network is formed in the exposed area to become a strong crosslinked film. The photosensitive resin composition layer (cured film) is not damaged by the surface activation treatment described later, and is cured by the surface activation treatment. The adhesion between the film and the metal layer or the adhesion between the cured films is more effectively improved. In addition, the resin preferably contains a partial structure represented by -Ar-L-Ar-. Wherein, Ar is each independently an aromatic group, and L is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group with 1 to 10 carbons which may be substituted by a fluorine atom, -O-, -CO-, -S-, -SO 2 -or -NHCO- and Including a combination of two or more of the above groups. With this structure, the photosensitive resin composition layer (cured film) becomes a flexible structure, and the effect of suppressing delamination between layers is more effectively exerted. Ar is preferably a phenylene group, L is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group with 1 or 2 carbons which may be substituted by a fluorine atom, and -O-, -CO-, -S- or -SO 2 -is more preferred. Among them, the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably an alkylene group.

(聚醯亞胺前驅物) 聚醯亞胺前驅物中,其種類等並無特別限定,包含由下述式(2)表示之重複單元為較佳。 式(2) [化學式1]

Figure 02_image001
式(2)中,A1 及A2 分別獨立地表示氧原子或NH,R111 表示2價有機基,R115 表示4價有機基,R113 及R114 分別獨立地表示氫原子或1價有機基。(Polyimine Precursor) The type of polyimide precursor is not particularly limited, but it is preferable to include a repeating unit represented by the following formula (2). Formula (2) [Chemical Formula 1]
Figure 02_image001
In formula (2), A 1 and A 2 each independently represent an oxygen atom or NH, R 111 represents a divalent organic group, R 115 represents a tetravalent organic group, and R 113 and R 114 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group. Organic base.

式(2)中的A1 及A2 是氧原子或NH為較佳,氧原子為更佳。 式(2)中的R111 表示2價有機基。作為2價有機基,例示包含直鏈或分支脂肪族基、環狀脂肪族基及芳香族基之基團,碳數2~20的直鏈或分支脂肪族基、碳數6~20的環狀脂肪族基、碳數6~20的芳香族基或包括它們的組合之基團為較佳,包括碳數6~20的芳香族基之基團為更佳。作為特佳的實施方式,可例示式(2)中的R111 是由-Ar-L-Ar-表示之基團。但是,Ar分別獨立地為芳香族基,L是可以由氟原子取代之碳數1~10的脂肪族烴基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO2 -或-NHCO-及包括上述中的兩個以上的組合之基團。這些較佳的範圍與上述相同。 A 1 and A 2 in the formula (2) are preferably an oxygen atom or NH, more preferably an oxygen atom. R 111 in the formula (2) represents a divalent organic group. Examples of divalent organic groups include groups containing linear or branched aliphatic groups, cyclic aliphatic groups, and aromatic groups, linear or branched aliphatic groups with 2 to 20 carbons, and rings with 6 to 20 carbons. A morphological aliphatic group, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or a group including a combination thereof are preferred, and a group including an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is more preferred. As a particularly preferred embodiment, R 111 in the formula (2) can be exemplified as a group represented by -Ar-L-Ar-. However, Ar is each independently an aromatic group, and L is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group with 1 to 10 carbons which may be substituted by a fluorine atom, -O-, -CO-, -S-, -SO 2 -or -NHCO- and Including a combination of two or more of the above groups. These preferable ranges are the same as described above.

式(2)中的R111 由二胺衍生為較佳。作為在聚醯亞胺前驅物的製造中所使用之二胺,可列舉直鏈或分支脂肪族、環狀脂肪族或芳香族二胺等。二胺可以僅使用一種,亦可以使用兩種以上。 具體而言,是含有碳數2~20的直鏈或分支脂肪族基、碳數6~20的環狀脂肪族基、碳數6~20的芳香族基或包括它們的組合之基團之二胺為較佳,含有由碳數6~20的芳香族基構成之基團之二胺為更佳。作為芳香族基的例,可列舉下述芳香族基。 Preferably, R 111 in formula (2) is derived from diamine. Examples of the diamine used in the production of the polyimide precursor include linear or branched aliphatic, cyclic aliphatic, or aromatic diamines. Only one type of diamine may be used, or two or more types may be used. Specifically, it is one of a group containing a linear or branched aliphatic group having 2 to 20 carbons, a cyclic aliphatic group having 6 to 20 carbons, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbons, or a combination thereof Diamines are preferred, and diamines containing a group composed of an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms are more preferred. As an example of an aromatic group, the following aromatic groups can be mentioned.

[化學式2]

Figure 02_image003
上述芳香族基中,A是選自單鍵或可以由氟原子取代之碳數1~10的脂肪族烴基、-O-、-C(=O)-、-S-、-S(=O)2 -、-NHCO-及它們的組合之基團為較佳,是選自單鍵、可以由氟原子取代之碳數1~3的伸烷基、-O-、-C(=O)-、-S-、-SO2 -之基團為更佳,選自包括-CH2 -、-O-、-S-、-SO2 -、-C(CF32 -及-C(CH32 -之組中之2價基團為進一步較佳。[Chemical formula 2]
Figure 02_image003
In the above aromatic groups, A is selected from single bonds or aliphatic hydrocarbon groups with 1 to 10 carbons that can be substituted with fluorine atoms, -O-, -C(=O)-, -S-, -S(=O ) 2 -, -NHCO- and their combination groups are preferably selected from single bonds, alkylene groups with 1 to 3 carbons that can be substituted by fluorine atoms, -O-, -C (=O) -, -S-, -SO 2 -are more preferably selected from groups including -CH 2 -, -O-, -S-, -SO 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -and -C( The divalent group in the group of CH 3 ) 2-is further preferred.

作為二胺,具體而言可列舉選自1,2-二胺基乙烷、1,2-二胺基丙烷、1,3-二胺基丙烷、1,4-二胺基丁烷及1,6-二胺基己烷;1,2-二胺基環戊烷或1,3-二胺基環戊烷、1,2-二胺基環己烷、1,3-二胺基環己烷或1,4-二胺基環己烷、1,2-雙(胺基甲基)環己烷、1,3-雙(胺基甲基)環己烷或1,4-雙(胺基甲基)環己烷、雙-(4-胺基環己基)甲烷、雙-(3-胺基環己基)甲烷、4,4’-二胺基-3,3’-二甲基環己基甲烷及異佛爾酮二胺;間苯二胺及對苯二胺、二胺基甲苯、4,4’-二胺基聯苯及3,3’-二胺基聯苯、4,4’-二胺基二苯醚及3,3’-二胺基二苯醚、4,4’-二胺基二苯基甲烷及3,3’-二胺基二苯基甲烷、4,4’-二胺基二苯基碸及3,3’-二胺基二苯基碸、4,4’-二胺基二苯硫醚及3,3’-二胺基二苯硫醚、4,4’-二胺基二苯甲酮及3,3’-二胺基二苯甲酮、3,3’-二甲基-4,4’-二胺基聯苯、2,2’-二甲基-4,4’-二胺基聯苯、3,3’-二甲氧基-4,4’-二胺基聯苯、2,2-雙(4-胺基苯基)丙烷、2,2-雙(4-胺基苯基)六氟丙烷、2,2-雙(3-羥基-4-胺基苯基)丙烷、2,2-雙(3-羥基-4-胺基苯基)六氟丙烷、2,2-雙(3-胺基-4-羥基苯基)丙烷、2,2-雙(3-胺基-4-羥基苯基)六氟丙烷、雙(3-胺基-4-羥基苯基)碸、雙(4-胺基-3-羥基苯基)碸、4,4’-二胺基對聯三苯、4,4’-雙(4-胺基苯氧基)聯苯、雙[4-(4-胺基苯氧基)苯基]碸、雙[4-(3-胺基苯氧基)苯基]碸、雙[4-(2-胺基苯氧基)苯基]碸、1,4-雙(4-胺基苯氧基)苯、9,10-雙(4-胺基苯基)蒽、3,3’-二甲基-4,4’-二胺基二苯基碸、1,3-雙(4-胺基苯氧基)苯、1,3-雙(3-胺基苯氧基)苯、1,3-雙(4-胺基苯基)苯、3,3’-二乙基-4,4’-二胺基二苯基甲烷、3,3’-二甲基-4,4’-二胺基二苯基甲烷、4,4’-二胺基八氟聯苯、2,2-雙[4-(4-胺基苯氧基)苯基]丙烷、2,2-雙[4-(4-胺基苯氧基)苯基]六氟丙烷、9,9-雙(4-胺基苯基)-10-氫蒽、3,3’,4,4’-四胺基聯苯、3,3’,4,4’-四胺基二苯醚、1,4-二胺基蒽醌、1,5-二胺基蒽醌、3,3-二羥基-4,4’-二胺基聯苯、9,9’-雙(4-胺基苯基)茀、4,4’-二甲基-3,3’-二胺基二苯基碸、3,3’,5,5’-四甲基-4,4’-二胺基二苯基甲烷、2,4-二胺基枯烯及2,5-二胺基枯烯、2,5-二甲基-對苯二胺、乙醯胍胺、2,3,5,6-四甲基-對苯二胺、2,4,6-三甲基-間苯二胺、雙(3-胺基丙基)四甲基二矽氧烷、2,7-二胺基茀、2,5-二胺基吡啶、1,2-雙(4-胺基苯基)乙烷、二胺基苯甲醯苯胺、二胺基苯甲酸的酯、1,5-二胺基萘、二胺基三氟甲苯、二胺基蒽醌、1,3-雙(4-胺基苯基)六氟丙烷、1,4-雙(4-胺基苯基)八氟丁烷、1,5-雙(4-胺基苯基)十氟戊烷、1,7-雙(4-胺基苯基)十四氟庚烷、2,2-雙[4-(3-胺基苯氧基)苯基]六氟丙烷、2,2-雙[4-(2-胺基苯氧基)苯基]六氟丙烷、2,2-雙[4-(4-胺基苯氧基)-3,5-二甲基苯基]六氟丙烷、2,2-雙[4-(4-胺基苯氧基)-3,5-雙(三氟甲基)苯基]六氟丙烷、對雙(4-胺基-2-三氟甲基苯氧基)苯、4,4’-雙(4-胺基-2-三氟甲基苯氧基)聯苯、4,4’-雙(4-胺基-3-三氟甲基苯氧基)聯苯、4,4’-雙(4-胺基-2-三氟甲基苯氧基)二苯基碸、4,4’-雙(3-胺基-5-三氟甲基苯氧基)二苯基碸、2,2-雙[4-(4-胺基-3-三氟甲基苯氧基)苯基]六氟丙烷、3,3’,5,5’-四甲基-4,4’-二胺基聯苯、4,4’-二胺基-2,2’-雙(三氟甲基)聯苯、2,2’,5,5’,6,6’-六氟聯甲苯胺及4,4’’’-二胺基四聯苯中之至少一種二胺。As the diamine, specifically selected from 1,2-diaminoethane, 1,2-diaminopropane, 1,3-diaminopropane, 1,4-diaminobutane, and 1 ,6-Diaminohexane; 1,2-diaminocyclopentane or 1,3-diaminocyclopentane, 1,2-diaminocyclohexane, 1,3-diaminocyclopentane Hexane or 1,4-diaminocyclohexane, 1,2-bis(aminomethyl)cyclohexane, 1,3-bis(aminomethyl)cyclohexane or 1,4-bis( Aminomethyl) cyclohexane, bis-(4-aminocyclohexyl)methane, bis-(3-aminocyclohexyl)methane, 4,4'-diamino-3,3'-dimethyl Cyclohexylmethane and isophorone diamine; m-phenylenediamine and p-phenylenediamine, diaminotoluene, 4,4'-diaminobiphenyl and 3,3'-diaminobiphenyl, 4, 4'-diaminodiphenyl ether and 3,3'-diaminodiphenyl ether, 4,4'-diaminodiphenylmethane and 3,3'-diaminodiphenylmethane, 4, 4'-diaminodiphenyl sulfide and 3,3'-diaminodiphenyl sulfide, 4,4'-diaminodiphenyl sulfide and 3,3'-diaminodiphenyl sulfide, 4,4'-diaminobenzophenone and 3,3'-diaminobenzophenone, 3,3'-dimethyl-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 2,2' -Dimethyl-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 3,3'-dimethoxy-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 2,2-bis(4-aminophenyl) Propane, 2,2-bis(4-aminophenyl)hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis(3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(3-hydroxy-4- Aminophenyl) hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)hexafluoropropane, double (3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl) arsenic, bis(4-amino-3-hydroxyphenyl) arsenic, 4,4'-diamino-p-terphenyl, 4,4'-bis(4- Aminophenoxy) biphenyl, bis[4-(4-aminophenoxy)phenyl] chrysene, bis[4-(3-aminophenoxy) phenyl] chrysene, bis[4-( 2-aminophenoxy) phenyl] chrysene, 1,4-bis(4-aminophenoxy)benzene, 9,10-bis(4-aminophenyl)anthracene, 3,3'-bis Methyl-4,4'-diaminodiphenyl benzene, 1,3-bis(4-aminophenoxy)benzene, 1,3-bis(3-aminophenoxy)benzene, 1, 3-bis(4-aminophenyl)benzene, 3,3'-diethyl-4,4'-diaminodiphenylmethane, 3,3'-dimethyl-4,4'-di Amino diphenylmethane, 4,4'-diaminooctafluorobiphenyl, 2,2-bis[4-(4-aminophenoxy)phenyl]propane, 2,2-bis[4- (4-Aminophenoxy)phenyl]hexafluoropropane, 9,9-bis(4-aminophenyl)-10-hydroanthracene, 3,3',4,4'-tetraaminobiphenyl , 3,3',4,4'-tetraaminodiphenyl ether, 1,4-diaminoanthraquinone, 1,5-diaminoanthraquinone, 3,3-dihydroxy-4,4'- Diaminobiphenyl, 9,9'-bis(4-amine Phenyl) pyrene, 4,4'-dimethyl-3,3'-diaminodiphenyl sulfonium, 3,3',5,5'-tetramethyl-4,4'-diamino Diphenylmethane, 2,4-diaminocumene and 2,5-diaminocumene, 2,5-dimethyl-p-phenylenediamine, acetguanamine, 2,3,5,6 -Tetramethyl-p-phenylenediamine, 2,4,6-trimethyl-m-phenylenediamine, bis(3-aminopropyl)tetramethyldisiloxane, 2,7-diaminopyridine , 2,5-Diaminopyridine, 1,2-bis(4-aminophenyl)ethane, diaminobenzaniline, ester of diaminobenzoic acid, 1,5-diaminonaphthalene , Diaminobenzotrifluoride, diaminoanthraquinone, 1,3-bis(4-aminophenyl)hexafluoropropane, 1,4-bis(4-aminophenyl)octafluorobutane, 1 ,5-bis(4-aminophenyl)decafluoropentane, 1,7-bis(4-aminophenyl)tetradecafluoroheptane, 2,2-bis[4-(3-aminobenzene) Oxy)phenyl]hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis[4-(2-aminophenoxy)phenyl]hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis[4-(4-aminophenoxy) )-3,5-Dimethylphenyl]hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis[4-(4-aminophenoxy)-3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]hexafluoro Propane, p-bis(4-amino-2-trifluoromethylphenoxy)benzene, 4,4'-bis(4-amino-2-trifluoromethylphenoxy)biphenyl, 4,4 '-Bis(4-amino-3-trifluoromethylphenoxy)biphenyl, 4,4'-bis(4-amino-2-trifluoromethylphenoxy)diphenyl sulfide, 4 ,4'-bis(3-amino-5-trifluoromethylphenoxy) diphenyl sulfide, 2,2-bis[4-(4-amino-3-trifluoromethylphenoxy) Phenyl]hexafluoropropane, 3,3',5,5'-tetramethyl-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 4,4'-diamino-2,2'-bis(trifluoro (Methyl) biphenyl, at least one diamine among 2,2',5,5',6,6'-hexafluorotolidine and 4,4'''-diaminotetrabiphenyl.

又,以下所示之二胺(DA-1)~(DA-18)亦為較佳。In addition, the diamines (DA-1) to (DA-18) shown below are also preferable.

[化學式3]

Figure 02_image005
[Chemical formula 3]
Figure 02_image005

[化學式4]

Figure 02_image007
[Chemical formula 4]
Figure 02_image007

又,作為較佳的例,亦可列舉於主鏈具有至少兩個以上的伸烷基二醇單元之二胺。較佳為於一分子中組合乙二醇鏈、丙二醇鏈中的任一個或兩者而包含之二胺,更佳為不包含芳香環之二胺。作為具體例,可列舉JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)KH-511、JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)ED-600、JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)ED-900、JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)ED-2003、JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)EDR-148、JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)EDR-176、D-200、D-400、D-2000、D-4000(以上為產品名,HUNTSMAN製)、1-(2-(2-(2-胺基丙氧基)乙氧基)丙氧基)丙烷-2-胺、1-(1-(1-(2-胺基丙氧基)丙烷-2-基)氧基)丙烷-2-胺等,但並不限定於這些。 以下示出JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)KH-511、JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)ED-600、JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)ED-900、JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)ED-2003、JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)EDR-148、JEFFAMINE(註冊商標)EDR-176的結構。In addition, as a preferred example, diamines having at least two alkylene glycol units in the main chain can also be cited. Preferably, it is a diamine which combines either or both of an ethylene glycol chain and a propylene glycol chain in one molecule, and it is more preferable that it does not contain an aromatic ring. Specific examples include JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) KH-511, JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) ED-600, JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) ED-900, JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) ED-2003, JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) EDR-148 , JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) EDR-176, D-200, D-400, D-2000, D-4000 (the above are product names, manufactured by HUNTSMAN), 1-(2-(2-(2-aminopropoxy) Ethoxy)propoxy)propane-2-amine, 1-(1-(1-(2-aminopropoxy)propan-2-yl)oxy)propane-2-amine, etc., but It is not limited to these. The following shows JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) KH-511, JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) ED-600, JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) ED-900, JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) ED-2003, JEFFAMINE (registered trademark) EDR-148, JEFFAMINE ( Registered trademark) The structure of EDR-176.

[化學式5]

Figure 02_image009
[Chemical formula 5]
Figure 02_image009

上述中,x、y、z為平均值。In the above, x, y, and z are average values.

從所得到之硬化膜的柔軟性的觀點考慮,式(2)中的R111 由-Ar-L-Ar-表示為較佳。其中,Ar分別獨立地為芳香族基,L包括可以由氟原子取代之碳數1~10的脂肪族烴基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO2 -或-NHCO-及上述中的兩個以上的組合之基團。Ar是伸苯基為較佳,L是可以由氟原子取代之碳數1或2的脂肪族烴基、-O-、-CO-、-S-或-SO2 -為進一步較佳。其中,脂肪族烴基是伸烷基為較佳。From the viewpoint of the flexibility of the cured film obtained, R 111 in the formula (2) is preferably represented by -Ar-L-Ar-. Wherein, Ar is each independently an aromatic group, and L includes an aliphatic hydrocarbon group with 1 to 10 carbons which may be substituted by a fluorine atom, -O-, -CO-, -S-, -SO 2 -or -NHCO- and A group of a combination of two or more of the above. Ar is preferably a phenylene group, L is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group with 1 or 2 carbons which may be substituted by a fluorine atom, and -O-, -CO-, -S- or -SO 2 -is more preferred. Among them, the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably an alkylene group.

從i射線透過率的觀點考慮,式(2)中的R111 是由下述式(51)或式(61)表示之2價有機基為較佳。尤其,從i射線透過率、易獲得的觀點考慮,由式(61)表示之2價有機基為更佳。 式(51) [化學式6]

Figure 02_image011
式(51)中,R10 ~R17 分別獨立地為氫原子、氟原子或1價有機基,R10 ~R17 中的至少一個是氟原子、甲基或三氟甲基。 作為R10 ~R17 的1價有機基,可列舉碳數1~10(較佳為碳數1~6)的未經取代的烷基、碳數1~10(較佳為碳數1~6)的氟化烷基等。 式(61) [化學式7]
Figure 02_image013
式(61)中,R18 及R19 分別獨立地為氟原子或三氟甲基。 作為賦予式(51)或(61)的結構之二胺化合物,可列舉2,2’-二甲基聯苯胺、2,2’-雙(三氟甲基)-4,4’-二胺基聯苯、2,2’-雙(氟)-4,4’-二胺基聯苯、4,4’-二胺基八氟聯苯等。該些可以使用一種或組合使用兩種以上。From the viewpoint of i-ray transmittance, R 111 in the formula (2) is preferably a divalent organic group represented by the following formula (51) or formula (61). In particular, from the viewpoint of i-ray transmittance and easy availability, the divalent organic group represented by the formula (61) is more preferable. Formula (51) [Chemical Formula 6]
Figure 02_image011
In formula (51), R 10 to R 17 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or a monovalent organic group, and at least one of R 10 to R 17 is a fluorine atom, a methyl group, or a trifluoromethyl group. Examples of the monovalent organic group of R 10 to R 17 include unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbons (preferably 1 to 6 carbons), and 1 to 10 carbons (preferably 1 to 6 carbons). 6) The fluorinated alkyl group and so on. Formula (61) [Chemical Formula 7]
Figure 02_image013
In the formula (61), R 18 and R 19 are each independently a fluorine atom or a trifluoromethyl group. Examples of the diamine compound imparting the structure of formula (51) or (61) include 2,2'-dimethylbenzidine and 2,2'-bis(trifluoromethyl)-4,4'-diamine Biphenyl, 2,2'-bis(fluoro)-4,4'-diaminobiphenyl, 4,4'-diaminooctafluorobiphenyl, etc. These can be used 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types.

式(2)中的R115 表示4價有機基。作為4價有機基,包含芳香環之4價有機基為較佳,由下述式(5)或式(6)表示之基團為更佳。 式(5) [化學式8]

Figure 02_image015
式(5)中,R112 是選自單鍵或可以由氟原子取代之碳數1~10的脂肪族烴基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO2 -、-NHCO-以及包括它們的組合之基團為較佳,是選自單鍵、可以由氟原子取代之碳數1~3的伸烷基、-O-、-CO-、-S-及-SO2 -之基團為更佳,選自包括-CH2 -、-C(CF32 -、-C(CH32 -、-O-、-CO-、-S-及-SO2 -之組中之2價基團為進一步較佳。 R 115 in formula (2) represents a tetravalent organic group. As the tetravalent organic group, a tetravalent organic group containing an aromatic ring is preferred, and a group represented by the following formula (5) or formula (6) is more preferred. Formula (5) [Chemical Formula 8]
Figure 02_image015
In formula (5), R 112 is selected from a single bond or an aliphatic hydrocarbon group with 1 to 10 carbons which may be substituted by a fluorine atom, -O- , -CO-, -S-, -SO 2 -, -NHCO- And groups including combinations thereof are preferred, and are selected from single bonds, alkylene groups with 1 to 3 carbons which may be substituted by fluorine atoms, -O-, -CO-, -S- and -SO 2- The group is more preferably selected from among -CH 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, -C(CH 3 ) 2 -, -O-, -CO-, -S- and -SO 2- The divalent group in the group is further preferred.

式(6) [化學式9]

Figure 02_image017
Formula (6) [Chemical Formula 9]
Figure 02_image017

關於式(2)中的R115 ,具體而言可列舉從四羧酸二酐去除酐基之後殘存之四羧酸殘基等。四羧酸二酐可以僅使用一種,亦可以使用兩種以上。 四羧酸二酐由下述式(O)表示為較佳。 式(O) [化學式10]

Figure 02_image019
式(O)中,R115 表示4價有機基。R115 的較佳範圍與式(2)中的R115 的定義相同,較佳範圍亦相同。 Regarding R 115 in the formula (2), specifically, the tetracarboxylic acid residue remaining after removing the anhydride group from the tetracarboxylic dianhydride and the like can be cited. Only one type of tetracarboxylic dianhydride may be used, or two or more types may be used. Tetracarboxylic dianhydride is preferably represented by the following formula (O). Formula (O) [Chemical Formula 10]
Figure 02_image019
In formula (O), R 115 represents a tetravalent organic group. The preferred range of formula R 115 and R 115 is the same as defined in (2), and preferred ranges are also the same.

作為四羧酸二酐的具體例,可例示選自均苯四甲酸二酐(Pyromellitic dianhydride,PMDA)、3,3’,4,4’-聯苯四羧酸二酐、3,3’,4,4’-二苯硫醚四羧酸二酐、3,3’,4,4’-二苯基碸四羧酸二酐、3,3’,4,4’-二苯甲酮四羧酸二酐、3,3’,4,4’-二苯基甲烷四羧酸二酐、2,2’,3,3’-二苯基甲烷四羧酸二酐、2,3,3’,4’-聯苯四羧酸二酐、2,3,3’,4’-二苯甲酮四羧酸二酐、4,4’氧基二鄰苯二甲酸的二酐、2,3,6,7-萘四羧酸二酐、1,4,5,7-萘四羧酸二酐、2,2-雙(3,4-二羧基苯基)丙烷二酐、2,2-雙(2,3-二羧基苯基)丙烷二酐、2,2-雙(3,4-二羧基苯基)六氟丙烷二酐、1,3-二苯基六氟丙烷-3,3,4,4-四羧酸二酐、1,4,5,6-萘四羧酸二酐、2,2’,3,3’-二苯基四羧酸二酐、3,4,9,10-苝四羧酸二酐、1,2,4,5-萘四羧酸二酐、1,4,5,8-萘四羧酸二酐、1,8,9,10-菲四羧酸二酐、1,1-雙(2,3-二羧基苯基)乙烷二酐、1,1-雙(3,4-二羧基苯基)乙烷二酐、1,2,3,4-苯四羧酸二酐及它們的碳數1~6的烷基和/或碳數1~6的烷氧基衍生物中之至少一種。As a specific example of tetracarboxylic dianhydride, can be exemplified selected from pyromellitic dianhydride (PMDA), 3,3',4,4'-biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3', 4,4'-diphenyl sulfide tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3',4,4'-diphenyl sulfide tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,3',4,4'-benzophenone tetra Carboxylic dianhydride, 3,3',4,4'-diphenylmethanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,2',3,3'-diphenylmethanetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,3,3 ',4'-Biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,3,3',4'-benzophenonetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 4,4'oxydiphthalic dianhydride, 2, 3,6,7-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,4,5,7-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,2-bis(3,4-dicarboxyphenyl)propane dianhydride, 2,2 -Bis(2,3-dicarboxyphenyl)propane dianhydride, 2,2-bis(3,4-dicarboxyphenyl)hexafluoropropane dianhydride, 1,3-diphenylhexafluoropropane-3, 3,4,4-tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,4,5,6-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 2,2',3,3'-diphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride, 3,4, 9,10-perylenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,2,4,5-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,4,5,8-naphthalenetetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,8,9,10-phenanthrene Tetracarboxylic dianhydride, 1,1-bis(2,3-dicarboxyphenyl)ethane dianhydride, 1,1-bis(3,4-dicarboxyphenyl)ethane dianhydride, 1,2, At least one of 3,4-benzenetetracarboxylic dianhydride and their C1-C6 alkyl group and/or C1-C6 alkoxy derivative.

又,作為較佳例還可列舉下述中所示出之四羧酸二酐(DAA-1)~(DAA-5)。 [化學式11]

Figure 02_image021
In addition, tetracarboxylic dianhydrides (DAA-1) to (DAA-5) shown below can also be cited as preferred examples. [Chemical formula 11]
Figure 02_image021

式(2)中的R111 和R115 中的至少一方具有羥基亦為較佳。更具體而言,作為R111 ,可列舉二胺基苯酚衍生物的殘基。It is also preferable that at least one of R 111 and R 115 in the formula (2) has a hydroxyl group. More specifically, as R 111 , a residue of a diaminophenol derivative can be mentioned.

式(2)中的R113 及R114 分別獨立地表示氫原子或1價有機基。 式(2)中的R113 及R114 中的至少一方包含聚合性基為較佳,兩者均包含聚合性基為較佳。聚合性基為藉由熱、自由基等的作用能夠進行交聯反應之基團。作為聚合性基,光自由基聚合性基為較佳。作為聚合性基的具體例,可列舉具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之基團、烷氧甲基、羥甲基、醯氧甲基、環氧基、氧雜環丁基、苯并噁唑基、嵌段異氰酸酯基、羥甲基、胺基。作為具有聚醯亞胺前驅物之自由基聚合性基,具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之基團為較佳。 作為具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之基團,可列舉乙烯基、(甲基)烯丙基、由下述式(III)表示之基團等。 R 113 and R 114 in formula (2) each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group. At least one of R 113 and R 114 in the formula (2) preferably contains a polymerizable group, and both of them preferably contain a polymerizable group. The polymerizable group is a group that can undergo a crosslinking reaction by the action of heat, free radicals, and the like. As the polymerizable group, a photoradical polymerizable group is preferred. Specific examples of polymerizable groups include groups having ethylenically unsaturated bonds, alkoxymethyl groups, hydroxymethyl groups, oxomethyl groups, epoxy groups, oxetanyl groups, benzoxazolyl groups, Block isocyanate group, methylol group, amine group. As a radical polymerizable group having a polyimide precursor, a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferred. Examples of the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a (meth)allyl group, a group represented by the following formula (III), and the like.

[化學式12]

Figure 02_image023
[Chemical formula 12]
Figure 02_image023

式(III)中,R200 表示氫原子或甲基,甲基為更佳。 式(III)中,R201 表示碳數2~12的伸烷基、-CH2 CH(OH)CH2 -或碳數4~30的聚氧伸烷基。 較佳的R201 的例中,可列舉伸乙基、伸丙基、三亞甲基、四亞甲基、1,2-丁二基、1,3-丁二基、五亞甲基、六亞甲基、八亞甲基、十二亞甲基、-CH2 CH(OH)CH2 -,伸乙基、伸丙基、三亞甲基、-CH2 CH(OH)CH2 -為更佳。 特佳為R200 是甲基,R201 是伸乙基。In the formula (III), R 200 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and a methyl group is more preferred. In the formula (III), R 201 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, -CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 -or a polyoxyalkylene group having 4 to 30 carbon atoms. Preferred examples of R 201 include ethylene, propylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene, 1,2-butanediyl, 1,3-butanediyl, pentamethylene, and hexamethylene. Methylene, octamethylene, dodecamethylene, -CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 -, ethylene, propylene, trimethylene, -CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 -are more good. Particularly preferably, R 200 is a methyl group and R 201 is an ethylene group.

式(2)中的R113 或R114 可以是除了聚合性基以外的1價有機基。 從針對有機溶劑的溶解度的觀點考慮,式(2)中的R113 或R114 是1價有機基為較佳。作為1價有機基,包含直鏈或分支烷基、環狀烷基或芳香族基為較佳。作為1價有機基,具有鍵結在構成芳基之碳原子之1、2或3個(較佳為1個)酸性基團之芳香族基及具有構成芳基之碳原子之1、2或3個(較佳為1個)酸性基團之芳烷基為特佳。具體而言,可列舉具有酸性基團之碳數6~20的芳香族基、具有酸性基團之碳數7~25的芳烷基。更具體而言,可列舉具有酸性基團之苯基及具有酸性基團之苄基。酸性基團是羥基為較佳。 R113 或R114 是氫原子、2-羥基苄基、3-羥基苄基及4-羥基苄基為進一步特佳。 R 113 or R 114 in formula (2) may be a monovalent organic group other than a polymerizable group. From the viewpoint of solubility with respect to an organic solvent, R 113 or R 114 in the formula (2) is preferably a monovalent organic group. As the monovalent organic group, it is preferable to include a linear or branched alkyl group, a cyclic alkyl group, or an aromatic group. As a monovalent organic group, an aromatic group having 1, 2, or 3 (preferably 1) acidic groups bonded to the carbon atoms constituting the aryl group, and 1, 2, or having carbon atoms constituting the aryl group Three (preferably one) aralkyl groups of acidic groups are particularly preferred. Specifically, a C6-C20 aromatic group which has an acidic group, and a C7-25 aralkyl group which has an acidic group are mentioned specifically,. More specifically, a phenyl group having an acidic group and a benzyl group having an acidic group can be cited. The acidic group is preferably a hydroxyl group. R 113 or R 114 is a hydrogen atom, and a 2-hydroxybenzyl group, a 3-hydroxybenzyl group, and a 4-hydroxybenzyl group are more particularly preferred.

式(2)中的R113 或R114 所表示之烷基的碳數是1~30為較佳。作為直鏈或分支烷基,例如,可列舉甲基、乙基、丙基、丁基、戊基、己基、庚基、辛基、壬基、癸基、十二烷基、十四烷基,十八烷基、異丙基、異丁基、第二丁基、第三丁基、1-乙基戊基及2-乙基己基。 式(2)中的R113 或R114 所表示之環狀的烷基可以是單環環狀的烷基,亦可以是多環環狀的烷基。作為單環環狀的烷基,例如,可列舉環丙基、環丁基、環戊基、環己基、環庚基及環辛基。作為多環環狀的烷基,例如,可列舉金剛烷基、降冰片基、冰片基、莰烯基(camphenyl)、十氫萘基、三環癸烷基、四環癸烷基、莰二醯基、二環己基及蒎烯基(pinenyl)。其中,從兼顧高感度化的觀點考慮,環己基為最佳。又,作為被芳香族基取代之烷基,被後述之芳香族基取代之直鏈烷基為較佳。 作為由式(2)中的R113 或R114 表示之芳香族基,具體而言,經取代或未經取代的苯環、萘環、戊搭烯環、茚環、薁環、庚搭烯環、二環戊二烯並苯環、苝環、稠五苯環、苊烯環、菲環、蒽環、稠四苯環、䓛環、三伸苯環、茀環、聯苯環、吡咯環、呋喃環、噻吩環、咪唑環、噁唑環、噻唑環、吡啶環、吡嗪環、嘧啶環、噠嗪環、吲哚嗪環、吲哚環、苯并呋喃環、苯并噻吩環、異苯并呋喃環、喹嗪環、喹啉環、酞嗪環、萘啶環、喹噁啉環、喹噁唑啉環、異喹啉環、咔唑環、啡啶環、吖啶環、啡啉環、噻蒽環、色烯環、二苯并哌喃環、啡噁噻環、啡噻嗪環或啡嗪環。苯環為最佳。The carbon number of the alkyl group represented by R 113 or R 114 in formula (2) is preferably 1-30. Examples of linear or branched alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, dodecyl, and tetradecyl. , Octadecyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, second butyl, tertiary butyl, 1-ethylpentyl and 2-ethylhexyl. The cyclic alkyl group represented by R 113 or R 114 in formula (2) may be a monocyclic cyclic alkyl group or a polycyclic cyclic alkyl group. Examples of monocyclic cyclic alkyl groups include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, and cyclooctyl. Examples of polycyclic cyclic alkyl groups include adamantyl, norbornyl, bornyl, camphenyl, decahydronaphthyl, tricyclodecyl, tetracyclodecyl, and camphenyl. Aceto, dicyclohexyl and pinenyl (pinenyl). Among them, the cyclohexyl group is the most preferable from the viewpoint of achieving high sensitivity. In addition, as the alkyl group substituted with an aromatic group, a linear alkyl group substituted with an aromatic group described later is preferred. As the aromatic group represented by R 113 or R 114 in formula (2), specifically, substituted or unsubstituted benzene ring, naphthalene ring, pentene ring, indene ring, azulene ring, heptene ring Ring, dicyclopentacene ring, perylene ring, fused pentacene ring, acenaphthylene ring, phenanthrene ring, anthracene ring, fused tetraphenyl ring, phenanthrene ring, terphenylene ring, pyrene ring, biphenyl ring, pyrrole Ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyridine ring, pyrazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyridazine ring, indoleazine ring, indole ring, benzofuran ring, benzothiophene ring , Isobenzofuran ring, quinazine ring, quinoline ring, phthalazine ring, naphthyridine ring, quinoxaline ring, quinoxazoline ring, isoquinoline ring, carbazole ring, phenanthridine ring, acridine ring , Phenanthroline ring, thianthracene ring, chromene ring, dibenzopyran ring, phenoxathi ring, phenothiazine ring or phenanthrazine ring. The benzene ring is the best.

當式(2)中的R113 是氫原子時,或者當式(2)中的R114 是氫原子時,聚醯亞胺前驅物可以與具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之3級胺化合物形成共軛鹼。作為具有該種乙烯性不飽和鍵之3級胺化合物的例,可列舉N,N-二甲基胺基甲基丙烯酸丙酯。 When R 113 in formula (2) is a hydrogen atom, or when R 114 in formula (2) is a hydrogen atom, the polyimide precursor can form a co-polymer with a tertiary amine compound having ethylenically unsaturated bonds. Conjugate base. Examples of tertiary amine compounds having such ethylenically unsaturated bonds include N,N-dimethylamino propyl methacrylate.

又,聚醯亞胺前驅物中,於結構單元中具有氟原子亦為較佳。聚醯亞胺前驅物中的氟原子含量是10質量%以上為較佳,又,20質量%以下為較佳。In addition, in the polyimide precursor, it is also preferable to have a fluorine atom in the structural unit. The content of fluorine atoms in the polyimide precursor is preferably 10% by mass or more, and more preferably 20% by mass or less.

又,以提高與基板的黏附性為目的,可以對聚醯亞胺前驅物共聚具有矽氧烷結構之脂肪族基。具體而言,作為用於導入矽氧烷結構之脂肪族基之二胺成分,可列舉雙(3-胺基丙基)四甲基二矽氧烷、雙(對胺基苯基)八甲基五矽氧烷等。In addition, for the purpose of improving the adhesion to the substrate, an aliphatic group having a siloxane structure can be copolymerized with the polyimide precursor. Specifically, as the diamine component used to introduce the aliphatic group of the silicone structure, bis(3-aminopropyl)tetramethyldisiloxane, bis(p-aminophenyl)octamethyl Base pentasiloxane and so on.

由式(2)表示之重複單元是由下述式(2-A)表示之重複單元為較佳。亦即,聚醯亞胺前驅物的至少一種是具有由式(2-A)表示之重複單元之前驅物為較佳。藉由該種結構,能夠進一步增加曝光寬容度的寬度。 式(2-A) [化學式13]

Figure 02_image025
式(2-A)中,A1 及A2 表示氧原子,R111 及R112 分別獨立地表示2價有機基,R113 及R114 分別獨立地表示氫原子或1價有機基,R113 及R114 中的至少一個是包含聚合性基之基團,是聚合性基為較佳。The repeating unit represented by the formula (2) is preferably the repeating unit represented by the following formula (2-A). That is, at least one of the polyimide precursors is preferably a precursor having a repeating unit represented by formula (2-A). With this structure, the width of exposure latitude can be further increased. Formula (2-A) [Chemical Formula 13]
Figure 02_image025
In formula (2-A), A 1 and A 2 represent an oxygen atom, R 111 and R 112 each independently represent a divalent organic group, R 113 and R 114 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and R 113 At least one of R 114 and R 114 is a group containing a polymerizable group, and is preferably a polymerizable group.

式(2-A)中的A1 、A2 、R111 、R113 及R114 分別獨立地與式(2)中的A1 、A2 、R111 、R113 及R114 定義相同,較佳範圍亦相同。 式(2-A)中的R112 與式(5)中的R112 定義相同,較佳範圍亦相同。Of formula (2-A) in A 1, A 2, R 111 , R 113 and R 114 each independently have the formula A 1, A 2, R 111 , the same as R 113 and R 114 defined in (2), more The optimal range is also the same. 112 same as defined in formula R 112 and R (5) in the formula (2-A), the preferred range is also the same.

聚醯亞胺前驅物中,由式(2)表示之重複單元可以是一種,亦可以是兩種以上。又,聚醯亞胺前驅物可以包含由式(2)表示之重複單元的結構異構體。又,除了由上述式(2)表示之重複單元以外,聚醯亞胺前驅物還可以包含另一種重複單元。In the polyimide precursor, the repeating unit represented by formula (2) may be one type or two or more types. In addition, the polyimide precursor may include structural isomers of the repeating unit represented by formula (2). Furthermore, in addition to the repeating unit represented by the above formula (2), the polyimide precursor may further include another repeating unit.

作為本發明中的聚醯亞胺前驅物的一實施方式,可例示總重複單元的50莫耳%以上,進而為70莫耳%以上,尤其90莫耳%以上是由式(2)表示之重複單元之聚醯亞胺前驅物。As an embodiment of the polyimide precursor in the present invention, 50 mol% or more of the total repeating unit can be exemplified, further 70 mol% or more, especially 90 mol% or more, represented by formula (2) Polyimide precursor of repeating unit.

聚醯亞胺前驅物藉由使二羧酸或二羧酸衍生物與二胺反應而得到為較佳。由利用鹵化劑將二羧酸或二羧酸衍生物鹵化之後,使其與二胺反應而得到為更佳。聚醯亞胺前驅物可利用如下方法來得到,例如,於低溫中使四羧酸二酐與二胺化合物(由作為單胺之封端劑取代一部分)反應之方法、於低溫中使四羧酸二酐(由作為酸酐或單酸氯化物或單活性酯化合物之封端劑取代一部分)與二胺化合物反應之方法、由四羧酸二酐和醇得到二酯之後,於縮合劑的存在下使其與二胺(由作為單胺之封端劑取代一部分)反應之方法、由四羧酸二酐和醇得到二酯之後,將殘留之羧酸酸氯化而使其與二胺(由作為單胺之封端劑取代一部分)反應之方法等方法。 聚醯亞胺前驅物的製造方法中,進行反應時,使用有機溶劑為較佳。有機溶劑可以是一種,亦可以是兩種以上。 作為有機溶劑,能夠依原料適當設定,可例示吡啶、二乙二醇二甲醚(二甘二甲醚)、N-甲基吡咯烷酮及N-乙基吡咯烷酮。The polyimide precursor is preferably obtained by reacting a dicarboxylic acid or a dicarboxylic acid derivative with a diamine. It is more preferably obtained by halogenating the dicarboxylic acid or dicarboxylic acid derivative with a halogenating agent and then reacting it with a diamine. The polyimide precursor can be obtained by the following methods, for example, a method of reacting a tetracarboxylic dianhydride with a diamine compound (partially replaced by a blocking agent as a monoamine) at a low temperature, and a tetracarboxylic acid at a low temperature. A method of reacting acid dianhydride (partially replaced by a blocking agent as an acid anhydride or monoacid chloride or monoactive ester compound) with a diamine compound, after the diester is obtained from tetracarboxylic dianhydride and alcohol, in the presence of a condensing agent Under the method of reacting with diamine (part of the capping agent as a monoamine), after obtaining the diester from tetracarboxylic dianhydride and alcohol, the remaining carboxylic acid is chlorinated to make it react with the diamine ( Substituting part of the capping agent as a monoamine) reaction method and other methods. In the production method of the polyimide precursor, it is preferable to use an organic solvent when the reaction is carried out. The organic solvent may be one type or two or more types. The organic solvent can be appropriately set according to the raw material, and pyridine, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether (diglyme), N-methylpyrrolidone, and N-ethylpyrrolidone can be exemplified.

製造聚醯亞胺前驅物時,為了進一步提高保存穩定性,用酸酐、單羧酸、單酸氯化物、單活性酯化合物等封端劑進行密封為較佳。該些中,使用單胺為更佳,作為單胺的較佳的化合物,可列舉苯胺、2-乙炔基苯胺、3-乙炔基苯胺、4-乙炔基苯胺、5-胺基-8-羥基喹啉、1-羥基-7-胺基萘、1-羥基-6-胺基萘、1-羥基-5-胺基萘、1-羥基-4-胺基萘、2-羥基-7-胺基萘、2-羥基-6-胺基萘、2-羥基-5-胺基萘、1-羧基-7-胺基萘、1-羧基-6-胺基萘、1-羧基-5-胺基萘、2-羧基-7-胺基萘、2-羧基-6-胺基萘、2-羧基-5-胺基萘、2-胺基苯甲酸、3-胺基苯甲酸、4-胺基苯甲酸、4-胺基水楊酸、5-胺基水楊酸、6-胺基水楊酸、2-胺基苯磺酸、3-胺基苯磺酸、4-胺基苯磺酸、3-胺基-4,6-二羥基嘧啶、2-胺基苯酚、3-胺基苯酚、4-胺基苯酚、2-胺基硫苯酚、3-胺基硫苯酚、4-胺基硫苯酚等。可以將該些使用兩種以上,亦可以藉由使複數個封端劑反應而導入複數個不同的末端基。When producing the polyimide precursor, in order to further improve the storage stability, it is preferable to seal it with a blocking agent such as an acid anhydride, a monocarboxylic acid, a monoacid chloride, and a monoactive ester compound. Among these, it is more preferable to use monoamines. As preferred compounds of monoamines, aniline, 2-ethynylaniline, 3-ethynylaniline, 4-ethynylaniline, 5-amino-8-hydroxyl Quinoline, 1-hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-4-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-7-amine Naphthalene, 2-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-5-amine Naphthalene, 2-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-aminobenzoic acid, 3-aminobenzoic acid, 4-amine Benzoic acid, 4-aminosalicylic acid, 5-aminosalicylic acid, 6-aminosalicylic acid, 2-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 3-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 4-aminobenzenesulfonic acid Acid, 3-amino-4,6-dihydroxypyrimidine, 2-aminophenol, 3-aminophenol, 4-aminophenol, 2-aminothiophenol, 3-aminothiophenol, 4-amine Thiophenol and so on. Two or more of these may be used, or a plurality of different terminal groups may be introduced by reacting a plurality of capping agents.

製造聚醯亞胺前驅物時,可以包含使析出固體之製程。具體而言,使反應液中的聚醯亞胺前驅物沉澱於水中,使四氫呋喃等聚醯亞胺前驅物溶解於可溶性溶劑,藉此能夠進行固體析出。 然後,對聚醯亞胺前驅物進行乾燥而能夠得到粉末狀聚醯亞胺前驅物。When the polyimide precursor is manufactured, a process for precipitation of solids may be included. Specifically, the polyimide precursor in the reaction liquid is precipitated in water, and the polyimide precursor such as tetrahydrofuran is dissolved in a soluble solvent, thereby enabling solid precipitation. Then, by drying the polyimide precursor, a powdery polyimine precursor can be obtained.

聚醯亞胺前驅物的重量平均分子量(Mw)較佳為18000~30000,更佳為20000~27000,進一步較佳為22000~25000。又,數量平均分子量(Mn)較佳為7200~14000,更佳為8000~12000,進一步較佳為9200~11200。 上述聚醯亞胺前驅物的分散度是2.5以上為較佳,2.7以上為更佳,2.8以上為進一步較佳。聚醯亞胺前驅物的分散度的上限值並無特別限定,例如,4.5以下為較佳,4.0以下為更佳,3.8以下為進一步較佳,3.2以下為進一步較佳,3.1以下為更進一步較佳,3.0以下為更進一步較佳,2.95以下為尤其進一步較佳。The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polyimide precursor is preferably 18,000 to 30,000, more preferably 20,000 to 27,000, and still more preferably 22,000 to 25,000. In addition, the number average molecular weight (Mn) is preferably 7,200 to 14,000, more preferably 8,000 to 12,000, and still more preferably 9200 to 11200. The dispersion of the polyimide precursor is preferably 2.5 or more, more preferably 2.7 or more, and even more preferably 2.8 or more. The upper limit of the degree of dispersion of the polyimide precursor is not particularly limited. For example, 4.5 or less is preferred, 4.0 or less is more preferred, 3.8 or less is more preferred, 3.2 or less is more preferred, and 3.1 or less is more preferred. More preferably, 3.0 or less is even more preferable, and 2.95 or less is especially more preferable.

(聚醯亞胺) 作為聚醯亞胺,只要是具有醯亞胺環之高分子化合物,則並無特別限定。聚醯亞胺是由下述式(4)表示之化合物為較佳,是由式(4)表示之化合物,且具有聚合性基之化合物為更佳。 式(4) [化學式14]

Figure 02_image027
式(4)中,R131 表示2價有機基,R132 表示4價有機基。 當具有聚合性基時,R131 及R132 中的至少一方可以具有聚合性基,如下述式(4-1)或式(4-2)所示那樣可以於聚醯亞胺的末端具有聚合性基。(Polyimine) The polyimine is not particularly limited as long as it is a polymer compound having an imine ring. The polyimide is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (4), is a compound represented by the formula (4), and more preferably has a polymerizable group. Formula (4) [Chemical Formula 14]
Figure 02_image027
In formula (4), R 131 represents a divalent organic group, and R 132 represents a tetravalent organic group. When it has a polymerizable group, at least one of R 131 and R 132 may have a polymerizable group. As shown in the following formula (4-1) or formula (4-2), it may have a polymerizable group at the end of the polyimide. Sex-based.

式(4-1) [化學式15]

Figure 02_image029
式(4-1)中,R133 是聚合性基,其他基團與式(4)的定義相同。Formula (4-1) [Chemical Formula 15]
Figure 02_image029
In the formula (4-1), R 133 is a polymerizable group, and other groups have the same definitions as in the formula (4).

式(4-2) [化學式16]

Figure 02_image031
式(4-2)中,R134 及R135 中的至少一個是聚合性基,另一個是有機基,其他基團與式(4)的定義相同。Formula (4-2) [Chemical formula 16]
Figure 02_image031
In the formula (4-2), at least one of R 134 and R 135 is a polymerizable group, the other is an organic group, and the other groups have the same definitions as in the formula (4).

關於由聚醯亞胺具有為較佳之聚合性基,與作為於上述聚醯亞胺前驅物中式(2)中的R113 及R114 可以含有之聚合性基而列舉之聚合性基相同。The preferable polymerizable group possessed by polyimine is the same as the polymerizable group exemplified as the polymerizable group that R 113 and R 114 in formula (2) in the polyimide precursor may contain.

式(4)中的R131 表示2價有機基。作為2價有機基,例示與式(2)中的R111 相同的2價有機基,較佳範圍亦相同。 又,作為R131 ,可列舉去除二胺的胺基之後殘留之二胺殘基。作為二胺,可列舉脂肪族、環式脂肪族或芳香族二胺等。作為具體例,可列舉聚醯亞胺前驅物的式(2)中的R111 的例。 R 131 in formula (4) represents a divalent organic group. As the divalent organic group, the same divalent organic group as R 111 in the formula (2) is exemplified, and the preferred range is also the same. Moreover, as R 131 , the diamine residue remaining after removing the amine group of the diamine can be mentioned. Examples of diamines include aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, or aromatic diamines. As a specific example, an example of R 111 in the formula (2) of the polyimide precursor can be cited.

從更加有效地抑制燒成時產生翹曲之方面考慮,式(4)中的R131 是於主鏈具有至少兩個以上的伸烷基二醇單元之二胺殘基為較佳。更佳為於一分子中組合乙二醇鏈、丙二醇鏈中的任一個或兩個而包含兩個以上之二胺殘基,進一步較佳為不包含芳香環之二胺殘基。From the viewpoint of more effectively suppressing warpage during firing, R 131 in formula (4) is preferably a diamine residue having at least two alkylene glycol units in the main chain. It is more preferable to combine any one or two of an ethylene glycol chain and a propylene glycol chain in one molecule to include two or more diamine residues, and still more preferably a diamine residue that does not include an aromatic ring.

作為於一分子中組合乙二醇鏈、丙二醇鏈中的任一個或兩個而包含兩個以上之二胺,可列舉與能夠衍生式(2)中的R111 之二胺相同的具體例等,但並不限定於此。As a diamine that combines any one or two of an ethylene glycol chain and a propylene glycol chain in one molecule to include two or more diamines, the same specific examples as the diamine capable of derivatizing R 111 in formula (2) can be cited. , But not limited to this.

式(4)中的R132 表示4價有機基。作為由R132 表示之4價有機基,例示與式(2)中的R115 相同者,較佳範圍亦相同。 例如,作為式(2)中的R115 而例示之下述結構的4價有機基的4個鍵結子與上述式(4)中的4個-C(=O)-的一部分鍵結而形成縮合環。 [化學式17]

Figure 02_image033
R 132 in the formula (4) represents a tetravalent organic group. As the tetravalent organic group represented by R 132 , the same as R 115 in formula (2) is exemplified, and the preferred range is also the same. For example, the four bonds of the tetravalent organic group of the following structure exemplified as R 115 in the formula (2) are bonded to a part of the four -C(=O)- in the above formula (4) to form Condensed ring. [Chemical formula 17]
Figure 02_image033

作為式(4)中的R132 的例,可列舉從四羧酸二酐去除酐基之後殘存之四羧酸殘基等。作為具體例,可列舉聚醯亞胺前驅物的式(2)中的R115 的例。從硬化膜的強度的觀點考慮,R132 是具有1~4個芳香環之芳香族二胺殘基為較佳。 Examples of R 132 in formula (4) include tetracarboxylic acid residues remaining after removing anhydride groups from tetracarboxylic dianhydride. As a specific example, an example of R 115 in the formula (2) of the polyimide precursor can be cited. From the viewpoint of the strength of the cured film, R 132 is preferably an aromatic diamine residue having 1 to 4 aromatic rings.

式(4)中的R131 和R132 中的至少一個具有羥基亦為較佳。更具體而言,作為式(4)中的R131 ,以2,2-雙(3-羥基-4-胺基苯基)丙烷、2,2-雙(3-羥基-4-胺基苯基)六氟丙烷、2,2-雙-(3-胺基-4-羥基苯基)丙烷、2,2-雙(3-胺基-4-羥基苯基)六氟丙烷、上述(DA-1)~(DA-18)作為較佳例而例舉。作為式(4)中的R132 ,以上述(DAA-1)~(DAA-5)作為較佳例而例舉。It is also preferable that at least one of R 131 and R 132 in the formula (4) has a hydroxyl group. More specifically, as R 131 in formula (4), 2,2-bis(3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(3-hydroxy-4-aminophenyl) Base) hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis-(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)hexafluoropropane, the above (DA -1) ~ (DA-18) are exemplified as preferred examples. As R 132 in the formula (4), the above-mentioned (DAA-1) to (DAA-5) are exemplified as preferable examples.

又,聚醯亞胺於結構單元中具有氟原子亦為較佳。聚醯亞胺中的氟原子含量是10質量%以上為較佳,進而20質量%以下為較佳。Furthermore, it is also preferable that the polyimide has a fluorine atom in the structural unit. The content of fluorine atoms in the polyimide is preferably 10% by mass or more, and more preferably 20% by mass or less.

又,以提高與基板的黏附性為目的,可以對聚醯亞胺共聚具有矽氧烷結構之脂肪族基。具體而言,作為用於導入具有矽氧烷結構之脂肪族基之二胺成分,可列舉雙(3-胺基丙基)四甲基二矽氧烷、雙(對胺基苯基)八甲基五矽氧烷等。In addition, for the purpose of improving adhesion to the substrate, an aliphatic group having a siloxane structure can be copolymerized with polyimide. Specifically, as the diamine component used to introduce an aliphatic group having a silicone structure, bis(3-aminopropyl)tetramethyldisiloxane, bis(p-aminophenyl) Methyl pentasiloxane and so on.

又,為了提高感光性樹脂組成物的保存穩定性,用單胺、酸酐、單羧酸、單酸氯化物、單活性酯化合物等封端劑密封聚醯亞胺的主鏈末端為較佳。該些中,使用單胺為更佳。作為單胺的較佳的例,可列舉苯胺、2-乙炔基苯胺、3-乙炔基苯胺、4-乙炔基苯胺、5-胺基-8-羥基喹啉、1-羥基-7-胺基萘、1-羥基-6-胺基萘、1-羥基-5-胺基萘、1-羥基-4-胺基萘、2-羥基-7-胺基萘、2-羥基-6-胺基萘、2-羥基-5-胺基萘、1-羧基-7-胺基萘、1-羧基-6-胺基萘、1-羧基-5-胺基萘、2-羧基-7-胺基萘、2-羧基-6-胺基萘、2-羧基-5-胺基萘、2-胺基苯甲酸、3-胺基苯甲酸、4-胺基苯甲酸、4-胺基水楊酸、5-胺基水楊酸、6-胺基水楊酸、2-胺基苯磺酸、3-胺基苯磺酸、4-胺基苯磺酸、3-胺基-4,6-二羥基嘧啶、2-胺基苯酚、3-胺基苯酚、4-胺基苯酚、2-胺基硫苯酚、3-胺基硫苯酚、4-胺基硫苯酚等。可以將該些使用兩種以上,亦可以藉由使複數個封端劑反應而導入複數個不同的末端基。Moreover, in order to improve the storage stability of the photosensitive resin composition, it is preferable to seal the main chain end of the polyimide with a blocking agent such as a monoamine, an acid anhydride, a monocarboxylic acid, a monoacid chloride, and a monoactive ester compound. Among these, it is more preferable to use monoamine. Preferred examples of monoamines include aniline, 2-ethynylaniline, 3-ethynylaniline, 4-ethynylaniline, 5-amino-8-hydroxyquinoline, 1-hydroxy-7-amino Naphthalene, 1-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-hydroxy-4-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 2-hydroxy-6-aminonaphthalene Naphthalene, 2-hydroxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 1-carboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-7-aminonaphthalene Naphthalene, 2-carboxy-6-aminonaphthalene, 2-carboxy-5-aminonaphthalene, 2-aminobenzoic acid, 3-aminobenzoic acid, 4-aminobenzoic acid, 4-aminosalicylic acid , 5-aminosalicylic acid, 6-aminosalicylic acid, 2-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 3-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 4-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 3-amino-4,6- Dihydroxypyrimidine, 2-aminophenol, 3-aminophenol, 4-aminophenol, 2-aminothiophenol, 3-aminothiophenol, 4-aminothiophenol, etc. Two or more of these may be used, or a plurality of different terminal groups may be introduced by reacting a plurality of capping agents.

聚醯亞胺的醯亞胺化率是85%以上為較佳,90%以上為更佳。醯亞胺化率是85%以上,藉此因加熱而被醯亞胺化時產生的閉環所引起之膜收縮變小,能夠抑制產生基板翹曲。The imidization rate of polyimide is preferably 85% or more, and more preferably 90% or more. The imidization rate is 85% or more, whereby the film shrinkage caused by the closed loop generated when the imidization is heated by heating is reduced, and the occurrence of substrate warping can be suppressed.

聚醯亞胺不僅包含全部是一種R131 或R132 之由上述式(4)表示之重複單元,還可以包含兩個以上的不同種類的R131 或R132 的重複單元。又,除了由上述式(4)表示之重複單元以外,聚苯并噁唑還可以包含其他種類的重複單元。Polyimide includes not only a whole R or R 131 is the repeating unit represented by the above formula (4) of 132, may also comprise two or more different types of repeating units, or R 131 is R 132. Furthermore, in addition to the repeating unit represented by the above formula (4), the polybenzoxazole may also include other types of repeating units.

關於聚醯亞胺,可以與對聚醯亞胺前驅物進行合成之後,加熱而使其環化來製造,亦可以直接對聚醯亞胺進行合成。 聚醯亞胺能夠利用如下方法來合成,亦即得到聚醯亞胺前驅物,並利用已知醯亞胺反應法使其完全醯亞胺化之方法或於途中停止醯亞胺化反應,並導入一部分醯亞胺結構之方法、進而將完全醯亞胺化之聚合物和該聚醯亞胺前驅物進行粉碎,藉此導入一部分醯亞胺結構之方法。Regarding the polyimide, it can be produced by synthesizing the polyimine precursor and then heating and cyclizing it, or it can be synthesized directly. Polyimine can be synthesized by the following method, that is, the polyimine precursor is obtained, and the known method of the imine reaction method is used to complete the imidization method or the imidization reaction is stopped on the way, and A method of introducing a part of the imine structure, and then a method of pulverizing the completely imidized polymer and the polyimide precursor, thereby introducing a part of the imine structure.

作為聚醯亞胺的市售品,例示Durimide(註冊商標)284(Fujifilm Corporation製)、Matrimide5218(HUNTSMAN製)。As a commercially available product of polyimide, Durimide (registered trademark) 284 (manufactured by Fujifilm Corporation) and Matrimide 5218 (manufactured by HUNTSMAN) are exemplified.

聚醯亞胺的重量平均分子量(Mw)是5,000~70,000為較佳,8,000~50,000為更佳,10,000~30,000為特佳。藉由將重量平均分子量設為5,000以上,能夠提高硬化後的膜的耐彎折性。為了得到機械特性優異之硬化膜,重量平均分子量是20,000以上為更佳。又,當含有兩種以上的聚醯亞胺時,至少一種聚醯亞胺的重量平均分子量是上述範圍為較佳。The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polyimide is preferably 5,000 to 70,000, more preferably 8,000 to 50,000, and particularly preferably 10,000 to 30,000. By setting the weight average molecular weight to 5,000 or more, the bending resistance of the cured film can be improved. In order to obtain a cured film with excellent mechanical properties, the weight average molecular weight is more preferably 20,000 or more. In addition, when two or more types of polyimines are contained, the weight average molecular weight of at least one type of polyimines is preferably within the above-mentioned range.

(聚苯并噁唑前驅物) 聚苯并噁唑前驅物中,其種類等並無特別限定,包含由下述式(3)表示之重複單元為較佳。 式(3) [化學式18]

Figure 02_image035
式(3)中,R121 表示2價有機基,R122 表示4價有機基,R123 及R124 分別獨立地表示氫原子或1價有機基。(Polybenzoxazole Precursor) The polybenzoxazole precursor is not particularly limited in its kind, etc., but preferably contains a repeating unit represented by the following formula (3). Formula (3) [Chemical Formula 18]
Figure 02_image035
In formula (3), R 121 represents a divalent organic group, R 122 represents a tetravalent organic group, and R 123 and R 124 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.

式(3)中的R123 及R124 分別與式(2)中的R113 的定義相同,較佳範圍亦相同。亦即,式(3)中的R123 及R124 中的至少一個是聚合性基為較佳。R 123 and R 124 in formula (3) have the same definitions as R 113 in formula (2), and their preferred ranges are also the same. That is, it is preferable that at least one of R 123 and R 124 in the formula (3) is a polymerizable group.

式(3)中的R121 表示2價有機基。作為由R121 表示之2價有機基,包含脂肪族基及芳香族基中的至少一個基為較佳。作為脂肪族基,直鏈脂肪族基為較佳。R121 是二羧酸殘基為較佳。二羧酸殘基可以僅使用一種,亦可以使用兩種以上。 R 121 in the formula (3) represents a divalent organic group. As the divalent organic group represented by R 121, it is preferable to include at least one of an aliphatic group and an aromatic group. As the aliphatic group, a straight-chain aliphatic group is preferred. R 121 is preferably a dicarboxylic acid residue. Only one type of dicarboxylic acid residue may be used, or two or more types may be used.

作為二羧酸,包含脂肪族基之二羧酸及包含芳香族基之二羧酸為較佳,包含芳香族基之二羧酸為更佳。 作為包含脂肪族基之二羧酸,包含直鏈或分支(較佳為直鏈)脂肪族基之二羧酸為較佳,包括直鏈或分支(較佳為直鏈)脂肪族基和兩個COOH之二羧酸為更佳。直鏈或分支(較佳為直鏈)脂肪族基的碳數是2~30為較佳,2~25為更佳,3~20為進一步較佳,4~15為特佳,5~10為進一步較佳。直鏈脂肪族基是伸烷基為較佳。 作為包含直鏈脂肪族基之二羧酸,可列舉丙二酸、二甲基丙二酸、乙基丙二酸、異丙基丙二酸、二-正丁基丙二酸、丁二酸、四氟丁二酸、甲基丁二酸、2,2-二甲基丁二酸、2,3-二甲基丁二酸、二甲基甲基丁二酸、戊二酸、六氟戊二酸、2-甲基戊二酸、3-甲基戊二酸、2,2-二甲基戊二酸、3,3-二甲基戊二酸、3-乙基-3-甲基戊二酸、己二酸、八氟己二酸、3-甲基己二酸、庚二酸、2,2,6,6-四甲基庚二酸、辛二酸、十二氟辛二酸、壬二酸、癸二酸、十六氟癸二酸、1,9-壬二酸、十二烷二酸、十三烷二酸、十四烷二酸、十五烷二酸、十六烷二酸、十七烷二酸、十八烷二酸、十九烷二酸、二十烷二酸、二十一烷二酸、二十二烷二酸、二十三烷二酸、二十四烷二酸、二十五烷二酸、二十六烷二酸、二十七烷二酸、二十八烷二酸、二十九烷二酸、三十烷二酸、三十一烷二酸、三十二烷二酸、二甘醇酸及由下述式表示之二羧酸等。As the dicarboxylic acid, a dicarboxylic acid containing an aliphatic group and a dicarboxylic acid containing an aromatic group are preferable, and a dicarboxylic acid containing an aromatic group is more preferable. As dicarboxylic acids containing aliphatic groups, dicarboxylic acids containing straight-chain or branched (preferably straight-chain) aliphatic groups are preferred, including straight-chain or branched (preferably straight-chain) aliphatic groups and two A COOH dicarboxylic acid is more preferable. The carbon number of the linear or branched (preferably linear) aliphatic group is preferably 2-30, more preferably 2-25, more preferably 3-20, particularly preferably 4-15, and 5-10 To be further preferred. The straight-chain aliphatic group is preferably an alkylene group. Examples of dicarboxylic acids containing linear aliphatic groups include malonic acid, dimethylmalonic acid, ethylmalonic acid, isopropylmalonic acid, di-n-butylmalonic acid, and succinic acid , Tetrafluorosuccinic acid, methylsuccinic acid, 2,2-dimethylsuccinic acid, 2,3-dimethylsuccinic acid, dimethylmethylsuccinic acid, glutaric acid, hexafluoro Glutaric acid, 2-methylglutaric acid, 3-methylglutaric acid, 2,2-dimethylglutaric acid, 3,3-dimethylglutaric acid, 3-ethyl-3-methyl Glutaric acid, adipic acid, octafluoroadipic acid, 3-methyladipic acid, pimelic acid, 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpimelic acid, suberic acid, dodecafluorooctane Diacid, azelaic acid, sebacic acid, hexadecanofluorosebacic acid, 1,9-azelaic acid, dodecanedioic acid, tridecanedioic acid, tetradecanedioic acid, pentadecanedioic acid, Hexadecanedioic acid, heptadecanedioic acid, octadecanedioic acid, nonadecanedioic acid, eicosanedioic acid, docosanedioic acid, behenedioic acid, tricosanedioic acid , Tetracosanedioic acid, pentacosanedioic acid, hexadecanedioic acid, hexadecanedioic acid, octadecanedioic acid, nonacosanedioic acid, triaconanedioic acid, three Undecanedioic acid, tridodecanedioic acid, diglycolic acid, dicarboxylic acid represented by the following formula, etc.

[化學式19]

Figure 02_image037
(式中,Z是碳數1~6的烴基,n是1~6的整數。)[Chemical formula 19]
Figure 02_image037
(In the formula, Z is a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 6 carbons, and n is an integer of 1 to 6.)

作為包含芳香族基之二羧酸,具有以下的芳香族基之二羧酸為較佳,僅包含以下芳香族基和兩個COOH之二羧酸為更佳。As the dicarboxylic acid containing an aromatic group, the dicarboxylic acid having the following aromatic group is preferable, and the dicarboxylic acid containing only the following aromatic group and two COOH is more preferable.

[化學式20]

Figure 02_image039
上述芳香族基中,A表示選自包括-CH2 -、-O-、-S-、-SO2 -、-CO-、-NHCO-、-C(CF32 -及-C(CH32 -之組中之2價基團。[Chemical formula 20]
Figure 02_image039
In the above aromatic group, A represents selected from the group consisting of -CH 2 -, -O-, -S-, -SO 2 -, -CO-, -NHCO-, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -and -C(CH 3 ) A divalent group in the group 2 -.

作為包含芳香族基之二羧酸的具體例,4,4’-羰基二苯甲酸、4,4’-二羧基二苯基醚及對苯二酸為較佳。As specific examples of dicarboxylic acids containing aromatic groups, 4,4'-carbonyldibenzoic acid, 4,4'-dicarboxydiphenyl ether, and terephthalic acid are preferred.

式(3)中的R122 表示4價有機基。作為由R122 表示之4價有機基,例示與上述式(2)中的R115 相同者,較佳範圍亦相同。 式(3)中的R122 進而是源自二胺基酚衍生物之基團為較佳。作為源自二胺基酚衍生物之基團,例如,可列舉3,3’-二胺基-4,4’-二羥基聯苯、4,4’-二胺基-3,3’-二羥基聯苯、3,3’-二胺基-4,4’-二羥基二苯基碸、4,4’-二胺基-3,3’-二羥基二苯基碸、雙-(3-胺基-4-羥基苯基)甲烷、2,2-雙-(3-胺基-4-羥基苯基)丙烷、2,2-雙-(3-胺基-4-羥基苯基)六氟丙烷、2,2-雙-(4-胺基-3-羥基苯基)六氟丙烷、雙-(4-胺基-3-羥基苯基)甲烷、2,2-雙-(4-胺基-3-羥基苯基)丙烷、4,4’-二胺基-3,3’-二羥基二苯甲酮、3,3’-二胺基-4,4’-二羥基二苯甲酮、4,4’-二胺基-3,3’-二羥基二苯醚、3,3’-二胺基-4,4’-二羥基二苯醚、1,4-二胺基-2,5-二羥基苯、1,3-二胺基-2,4-二羥基苯、1,3-二胺基-4,6-二羥基苯等。該些雙胺基苯酚可單獨使用或混合使用。 R 122 in the formula (3) represents a tetravalent organic group. As the tetravalent organic group represented by R 122 , the same as R 115 in the above formula (2) is exemplified, and the preferred range is also the same. R 122 in formula (3) is further preferably a group derived from a diaminophenol derivative. Examples of groups derived from diaminophenol derivatives include 3,3'-diamino-4,4'-dihydroxybiphenyl, 4,4'-diamino-3,3'- Dihydroxybiphenyl, 3,3'-diamino-4,4'-dihydroxydiphenyl sulfide, 4,4'-diamino-3,3'-dihydroxydiphenyl sulfide, bis-( 3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)methane, 2,2-bis-(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl)propane, 2,2-bis-(3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl) ) Hexafluoropropane, 2,2-bis-(4-amino-3-hydroxyphenyl)hexafluoropropane, bis-(4-amino-3-hydroxyphenyl)methane, 2,2-bis-( 4-amino-3-hydroxyphenyl) propane, 4,4'-diamino-3,3'-dihydroxybenzophenone, 3,3'-diamino-4,4'-dihydroxy Benzophenone, 4,4'-diamino-3,3'-dihydroxydiphenyl ether, 3,3'-diamino-4,4'-dihydroxydiphenyl ether, 1,4-di Amino-2,5-dihydroxybenzene, 1,3-diamino-2,4-dihydroxybenzene, 1,3-diamino-4,6-dihydroxybenzene, etc. These diaminophenols can be used alone or in combination.

二胺基苯酚衍生物中,具有下述芳香族基之二胺基苯酚衍生物為較佳。 Among diaminophenol derivatives, diaminophenol derivatives having the following aromatic groups are preferred.

Figure 106118059-A0305-02-0038-1
Figure 106118059-A0305-02-0038-1

上述式中,X1表示-O-、-S-、-C(CF3)2-、-CH2-、-SO2-、-NHCO-。 In the above formula, X 1 represents -O-, -S-, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, -CH 2 -, -SO 2 -, -NHCO-.

式(A-s) Formula (A-s)

Figure 106118059-A0305-02-0038-2
Figure 106118059-A0305-02-0038-2

式(A-s)中,R1是選自伸烷基、經取代伸烷基、-O-、-S-、-SO2-、-CO-、-NHCO-、單鍵或下述式(A-sc)的組中之有機基。 In formula (As), R 1 is selected from alkylene, substituted alkylene, -O-, -S-, -SO 2 -, -CO-, -NHCO-, single bond or the following formula (A -The organic group in the group of sc).

式(A-s)中,R2是氫原子、烷基、烷氧基、醯氧基、環狀烷基中的任一個,可以相同亦可以不同。 式(A-s)中,R3 是氫原子、直鏈或分支烷基、烷氧基、醯氧基、環狀烷基中的任一個,可以相同亦可以不同。In the formula (As), R 2 is any one of a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, and a cyclic alkyl group, and may be the same or different. In the formula (As), R 3 is any one of a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, and a cyclic alkyl group, which may be the same or different.

式(A-sc) [化學式23]

Figure 02_image045
(式(A-sc)中,*表示與由上述式(A-s)表示之二胺基苯酚衍生物的胺基苯酚的芳香環鍵結之情況。)Formula (A-sc) [Chemical formula 23]
Figure 02_image045
(In the formula (A-sc), * represents the condition of bonding to the aromatic ring of the aminophenol of the diaminophenol derivative represented by the above formula (As).)

上述式(A-s)中,酚性羥基的鄰位,亦即,認為於R3 亦具有取代基,可使醯胺鍵的羰基碳與羥基的距離更接近,並從進一步提高於低溫下硬化時成為高環化率之效果的方面考慮,為特佳。In the above formula (As), the ortho position of the phenolic hydroxyl group, that is, it is considered to have a substituent at R 3 , which can make the distance between the carbonyl carbon of the amide bond and the hydroxyl group closer, and further increase when hardened at low temperature. Considering the effect of high cyclization rate, it is particularly good.

又,上述式(A-s)中,R2 是烷基,且R3 是烷基時,能夠維持針對i射線的高透明性和於低溫下硬化時成為高環化率之效果,因此為較佳。In addition, in the above formula (As), when R 2 is an alkyl group, and R 3 is an alkyl group, it is preferable to maintain high transparency to i-rays and achieve a high cyclization rate when cured at low temperature. .

又,上述式(A-s)中,R1 是伸烷基或經取代伸烷基為進一步較佳。作為由R1 表示之伸烷基及經取代伸烷基的具體例,可列舉-CH2 -、-CH(CH3 )-、-C(CH32 -、-CH(CH2 CH3 )-、-C(CH3 )(CH2 CH3 )-、-C(CH2 CH3 )(CH2 CH3 )-、-CH(CH2 CH2 CH3 )-、-C(CH3 )(CH2 CH2 CH3 )-、-CH(CH(CH32 )-、-C(CH3 )(CH(CH32 )-、-CH(CH2 CH2 CH2 CH3 )-、-C(CH3 )(CH2 CH2 CH2 CH3 )-、-CH(CH2 CH(CH32 )-、-C(CH3 )(CH2 CH(CH32 )-、-CH(CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH3 )-、-C(CH3 )(CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH3 )-、-CH(CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH3 )-、-C(CH3 )(CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH3 )-等,其中-CH2 -、-CH(CH3 )-、-C(CH32 -亦可維持針對i射線的高透明性和於低溫下硬化時成為高環化率之效果的同時能夠得到相對於溶劑具有充分的溶解性,且平衡優異之聚苯并噁唑前驅物,因此為更佳。Furthermore, in the above formula (As), it is more preferable that R 1 is an alkylene group or a substituted alkylene group. Specific examples of the alkylene and substituted alkylene represented by R 1 include -CH 2 -, -CH(CH 3 )-, -C(CH 3 ) 2 -, -CH(CH 2 CH 3 ) -, -C (CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH 3 ) -, -C (CH 2 CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH 3 )-, -CH (CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) -, -C (CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) -, -CH (CH (CH 3 ) 2 ) -, -C (CH 3 ) (CH (CH 3 ) 2 ) -, -CH (CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) -, -C (CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) -, -CH (CH 2 CH (CH 3 ) 2 ) -, -C (CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH (CH 3 ) 2 ) -, -CH (CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) -, -C (CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) -, -CH (CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ) -, -C (CH 3 ) (CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 )-etc., where -CH 2 -, -CH (CH 3 ) -, -C (CH 3 ) 2 -It can also maintain high transparency to i-rays and the effect of high cyclization rate when cured at low temperature, while obtaining a polybenzoxazole precursor that has sufficient solubility with respect to solvents and an excellent balance, Therefore it is better.

作為由上述式(A-s)表示之二胺基酚衍生物的製造方法,例如,能夠參閱日本特開2013-256506號公報的0085~0094段及實施例1(0189~0190段),並將該些內容編入本說明書中。As a method for producing the diaminophenol derivative represented by the above formula (As), for example, refer to paragraphs 0085 to 0094 of JP 2013-256506 A and Example 1 (paragraphs 0189 to 0190), and the These contents are incorporated into this manual.

作為由上述式(A-s)表示之二胺基酚衍生物的結構的具體例,可列舉日本特開2013-256506號公報的0070~0080段中所記載者,並將該些內容編入本說明書中。當然,並不限定於該些。Specific examples of the structure of the diaminophenol derivative represented by the above formula (As) include those described in paragraphs 0070 to 0080 of JP 2013-256506 A, and these contents are incorporated into this specification . Of course, it is not limited to these.

除了由上述式(3)表示之重複單元以外,聚苯并噁唑前驅物還可以包含另一種重複單元。 從能夠抑制伴隨聚苯并噁唑前驅物的閉環之基板的翹曲的方面考慮,聚苯并噁唑前驅物包含由下述式(SL)表示之二胺殘基來作為另一種重複單元為較佳。In addition to the repeating unit represented by the above formula (3), the polybenzoxazole precursor may also include another repeating unit. From the viewpoint of suppressing the warpage of the substrate accompanying the ring closure of the polybenzoxazole precursor, the polybenzoxazole precursor contains a diamine residue represented by the following formula (SL) as another repeating unit: Better.

[化學式24]

Figure 02_image047
式(SL)中,Z具有a結構和b結構,R1s 是氫原子或碳數1~10的烴基,R2s 是碳數1~10的烴基,R3s 、R4s 、R5s 、R6s 中的至少一個是芳香族基,剩餘是氫原子或碳數1~30的有機基,該些可以分別相同或不同。a結構及b結構的聚合可以是嵌段聚合或隨機聚合。關於Z部分的莫耳%,a結構是5~95莫耳%,b結構是95~5莫耳%,a結構及b結構之和是100莫耳%。[Chemical formula 24]
Figure 02_image047
In formula (SL), Z has a structure and a structure b, R 1s is a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group with 1 to 10 carbons, R 2s is a hydrocarbon group with 1 to 10 carbons, R 3s , R 4s , R 5s , R 6s At least one of them is an aromatic group, and the remainder is a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and these may be the same or different. The polymerization of the a structure and the b structure can be block polymerization or random polymerization. Regarding the mole% of the Z part, the a structure is 5 to 95 mole%, the b structure is 95 to 5 mole%, and the sum of the a structure and the b structure is 100 mole%.

式(SL)中,作為較佳的Z,可列舉b結構中的R5s 及R6s 是苯基者。 又,由式(SL)表示之二胺殘基的分子量是400~4,000為較佳,500~3,000為更佳。將由式(SL)表示之二胺殘基的分子量設定在上述範圍,藉此能夠更加有效地降低聚苯并噁唑前驅物的脫水閉環後的彈性率,並能夠兼顧能夠抑制基板的翹曲之效果和提高溶劑溶解性之效果。In the formula (SL), preferred Z includes those in which R 5s and R 6s in the structure b are phenyl groups. In addition, the molecular weight of the diamine residue represented by the formula (SL) is preferably 400 to 4,000, and more preferably 500 to 3,000. Setting the molecular weight of the diamine residue represented by the formula (SL) within the above range can more effectively reduce the elastic modulus of the polybenzoxazole precursor after dehydration and ring closure, and can also suppress the warpage of the substrate. The effect and the effect of improving the solubility of the solvent.

作為另一種類的重複單元包含由式(SL)表示之二胺殘基時,作為重複單元包含從四羧酸二酐去除酐基之後殘存之四羧酸殘基亦為較佳。作為該種四羧酸殘基的例,可列舉式(2)中的R115 的例。When the diamine residue represented by the formula (SL) is included as another type of repeating unit, it is also preferable to include the tetracarboxylic acid residue remaining after removing the anhydride group from the tetracarboxylic dianhydride as the repeating unit. As an example of such a tetracarboxylic acid residue, an example of R 115 in the formula (2) can be given.

聚苯并噁唑前驅物的重量平均分子量(Mw)中,例如使用後述組成物時,較佳為18000~30000,更佳為20000~29000,進一步較佳為22000~28000。又,數量平均分子量(Mn)較佳為7200~14000,更佳為8000~12000,進一步較佳為9200~11200。 上述聚苯并噁唑前驅物的分散度是1.4以上為較佳,1.5以上為更佳,1.6以上為進一步較佳。聚苯并噁唑前驅物的分散度的上限值並無特別限定,例如,2.6以下為較佳,2.5以下為更佳,2.4以下為進一步較佳,2.3以下為進一步較佳,2.2以下為更進一步較佳。In the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polybenzoxazole precursor, for example, when the composition described later is used, it is preferably 18,000 to 30,000, more preferably 20,000 to 29,000, and still more preferably 22,000 to 28,000. In addition, the number average molecular weight (Mn) is preferably 7,200 to 14,000, more preferably 8,000 to 12,000, and still more preferably 9200 to 11200. The degree of dispersion of the polybenzoxazole precursor is preferably 1.4 or more, more preferably 1.5 or more, and even more preferably 1.6 or more. The upper limit of the degree of dispersion of the polybenzoxazole precursor is not particularly limited. For example, 2.6 or less is preferable, 2.5 or less is more preferable, 2.4 or less is more preferable, 2.3 or less is more preferable, and 2.2 or less is It is even better.

(聚苯并噁唑) 作為聚苯并噁唑,只要是具有苯并噁唑環之高分子化合物,則並無特別限定。聚苯并噁唑是由下述式(X)表示之化合物為較佳,由下述式(X)表示之化合物,且具有聚合性基之化合物為更佳。 [化學式25]

Figure 02_image049
式(X)中,R133 表示2價有機基,R134 表示4價有機基。 當具有聚合性基時,R133 及R134 中的至少一個可以具有聚合性基,如由下述式(X-1)或式(X-2)表示那樣可以於聚苯并噁唑的末端具有聚合性基。(Polybenzoxazole) The polybenzoxazole is not particularly limited as long as it is a polymer compound having a benzoxazole ring. Polybenzoxazole is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (X), a compound represented by the following formula (X), and a compound having a polymerizable group is more preferred. [Chemical formula 25]
Figure 02_image049
In formula (X), R 133 represents a divalent organic group, and R 134 represents a tetravalent organic group. When it has a polymerizable group, at least one of R 133 and R 134 may have a polymerizable group, and it may be at the end of the polybenzoxazole as represented by the following formula (X-1) or formula (X-2) Has a polymerizable group.

式(X-1) [化學式26]

Figure 02_image051
式(X-1)中,R135 及R136 中的至少一個是聚合性基,另一個是有機基,另一基團與式(X)的定義相同。Formula (X-1) [Chemical Formula 26]
Figure 02_image051
In the formula (X-1), at least one of R 135 and R 136 is a polymerizable group, the other is an organic group, and the other group has the same definition as the formula (X).

式(X-2) [化學式27]

Figure 02_image053
式(X-2)中,R137 是聚合性基,其他為取代基,其他基團與式(X)的定義相同。Formula (X-2) [Chemical Formula 27]
Figure 02_image053
In the formula (X-2), R137 is a polymerizable group, the others are substituents, and the other groups have the same definitions as in the formula (X).

由聚苯并噁唑具有為較佳之聚合性基與以由上述聚醯亞胺前驅物具有之聚合性基進行說明之聚合性基的定義相同。The polymerizable group preferably possessed by polybenzoxazole has the same definition as the polymerizable group described by the polymerizable group possessed by the polyimide precursor described above.

R133 表示2價有機基。作為2價有機基,可列舉脂肪族基或芳香族基。作為具體例,可列舉聚苯并噁唑前驅物的式(3)中的R121 的例。又,該較佳的例與R121 的定義相同。R 133 represents a divalent organic group. As a divalent organic group, an aliphatic group or an aromatic group can be mentioned. As a specific example, an example of R 121 in the formula (3) of the polybenzoxazole precursor can be cited. In addition, this preferred example has the same definition as R 121.

R134 表示4價有機基。作為4價有機基,可列舉聚苯并噁唑前驅物的式(3)中的R122 的例。又,該較佳的例與R122 的定義相同。 例如,作為R122 例示之4價有機基的4個鍵結子與上述式(X)中的氮原子、氧原子鍵結而形成縮合環。例如,當R134 是下述有機基時,形成下述結構。 [化學式28]

Figure 02_image055
R 134 represents a tetravalent organic group. Examples of the tetravalent organic group include R 122 in the formula (3) of the polybenzoxazole precursor. In addition, this preferred example has the same definition as R 122. For example, the four bonds of the tetravalent organic group exemplified as R 122 are bonded to the nitrogen atom and the oxygen atom in the above formula (X) to form a condensed ring. For example, when R 134 is the following organic group, the following structure is formed. [Chemical formula 28]
Figure 02_image055

聚苯并噁唑的噁唑化率是85%以上為較佳,90%以上為更佳。藉由噁唑化率是85%以上,因加熱而噁唑化時產生之閉環引起之膜收縮變小,能夠有效地抑制產生翹曲。The oxazolation rate of polybenzoxazole is preferably 85% or more, and more preferably 90% or more. Since the oxazolidization rate is 85% or more, the film shrinkage caused by the closed loop generated during oxazolidization due to heating becomes smaller, and the occurrence of warpage can be effectively suppressed.

聚苯并噁唑不僅包含全部基於一種R133 或R134 之由上述式(X)表示之重複單元,還可以包含包括兩個以上的不同種類的R133 或R134 基團之由上述式(X)表示之重複單元。又,除了由上述式(X)表示之重複單元以外,聚苯并噁唑還可以包含另一種重複單元。Polybenzoxazole not only includes all of the repeating units represented by the above formula (X) based on one kind of R 133 or R 134 , but may also include two or more different kinds of R 133 or R 134 groups which are derived from the above formula ( X) represents the repeating unit. Furthermore, in addition to the repeating unit represented by the above formula (X), the polybenzoxazole may contain another repeating unit.

聚苯并噁唑例如藉由使二胺基酚衍生物與選自包含R133 之二羧酸及上述二羧酸的二羧酸二氯化物及二羧酸衍生物等中之化合物反應而得到聚苯并噁唑前驅物,並利用已知噁唑化反應法使其噁唑化而得到。 此外,當為二羧酸時,為了提高反應收率等,可以使用使1-羥基-1,2,3-苯并三唑等預先反應之活性酯型二羧酸衍生物。Polybenzoxazole is obtained, for example, by reacting a diaminophenol derivative with a compound selected from the dicarboxylic acid containing R 133 and the dicarboxylic acid dichloride and dicarboxylic acid derivative of the above-mentioned dicarboxylic acid, etc. The polybenzoxazole precursor is obtained by oxazolation using a known oxazolation reaction method. In addition, in the case of a dicarboxylic acid, in order to increase the reaction yield, etc., an active ester-type dicarboxylic acid derivative that has been reacted in advance with 1-hydroxy-1,2,3-benzotriazole and the like can be used.

聚苯并噁唑的重量平均分子量(Mw)是5,000~70,000為較佳,8,000~50,000為更佳,10,000~30,000為特佳。藉由將重量平均分子量設為5,000以上,能夠提高硬化後的膜的耐彎折性。為了得到機械特性優異之硬化膜,重量平均分子量是20,000以上為更佳。又,當含有兩種以上的聚苯并噁唑時,至少一種聚苯并噁唑的重量平均分子量是上述範圍為較佳。The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of polybenzoxazole is preferably 5,000 to 70,000, more preferably 8,000 to 50,000, and particularly preferably 10,000 to 30,000. By setting the weight average molecular weight to 5,000 or more, the bending resistance of the cured film can be improved. In order to obtain a cured film with excellent mechanical properties, the weight average molecular weight is more preferably 20,000 or more. In addition, when two or more polybenzoxazoles are contained, the weight average molecular weight of at least one polybenzoxazole is preferably in the above-mentioned range.

(其他感光性樹脂) 即使是上述以外的感光性樹脂,還能能應用本發明。作為其他感光性樹脂,能夠使用環氧樹脂、苯酚樹脂、苯并環丁烷系樹脂。(Other photosensitive resin) Even if it is a photosensitive resin other than the above, this invention can be applied. As other photosensitive resins, epoxy resins, phenol resins, and benzocyclobutane-based resins can be used.

<<<聚合性化合物>>> 樹脂具有聚合性基,或者感光性樹脂組成物包含聚合性化合物為較佳。藉由該種結構,能夠形成耐熱性更加優異之硬化膜。 聚合性化合物是具有聚合性基之化合物,其能夠使用藉由自由基、酸、鹼性基團等能夠交聯反應之公知的化合物。作為聚合性基,例示以上述聚醯亞胺前驅物進行說明之聚合性基等。聚合性化合物可以僅包含一種,亦可以包含兩種以上。 關於聚合性化合物,例如是單體、預聚物、寡聚物或它們的混合物及它們的多聚體等等化學形態中的任一種。<<<Polymerizable compound>>> It is preferable that the resin has a polymerizable group, or the photosensitive resin composition contains a polymerizable compound. With this structure, a cured film with more excellent heat resistance can be formed. The polymerizable compound is a compound having a polymerizable group, and it is possible to use a known compound capable of crosslinking reaction by a radical, an acid, a basic group, or the like. As a polymerizable group, the polymerizable group etc. demonstrated using the said polyimide precursor are illustrated. The polymerizable compound may contain only one type or two or more types. Regarding the polymerizable compound, for example, it is any one of chemical forms such as monomers, prepolymers, oligomers, their mixtures, and their multimers.

本發明中,單體類型的聚合性化合物(以下,稱為聚合性單體)是與高分子化合物不同之化合物。聚合性單體典型地是低分子化合物,是分子量2000以下的低分子化合物為較佳,是1500以下的低分子化合物為更佳,是分子量900以下的低分子化合物為進一步較佳。此外,聚合性單體的分子量通常是100以上。 又,寡聚物類型的聚合性化合物典型地是分子量相對較低之聚合物,是鍵結有10個~100個聚合性單體之聚合物為較佳。寡聚物類型的聚合性化合物的重量平均分子量是2000~20000為較佳,2000~15000為更佳,2000~10000為最佳。In the present invention, the monomer-type polymerizable compound (hereinafter referred to as polymerizable monomer) is a compound different from the polymer compound. The polymerizable monomer is typically a low-molecular compound, and a low-molecular compound with a molecular weight of 2000 or less is preferable, a low-molecular compound with a molecular weight of 1500 or less is more preferable, and a low-molecular compound with a molecular weight of 900 or less is more preferable. In addition, the molecular weight of the polymerizable monomer is usually 100 or more. In addition, the oligomer-type polymerizable compound is typically a polymer with a relatively low molecular weight, and preferably a polymer with 10 to 100 polymerizable monomers bonded thereto. The weight average molecular weight of the oligomer type polymerizable compound is preferably 2,000 to 20,000, more preferably 2,000 to 15,000, and most preferably 2,000 to 10,000.

聚合性化合物的官能基數是指1分子中的聚合性基的數量。 從顯影性的觀點考慮,感光性樹脂組成物包含至少一種包括兩個以上的聚合性基之2官能以上的聚合性化合物為較佳,至少包含一種3官能以上的聚合性化合物為更佳。 從形成三維交聯結構而能夠提高耐熱性之方面考慮,感光性樹脂組成物包含至少一種3官能以上的聚合性化合物為較佳。又,可以是2官能以下的聚合性化合物與3官能以上的聚合性化合物的混合物。The number of functional groups of a polymerizable compound refers to the number of polymerizable groups in one molecule. From the viewpoint of developability, the photosensitive resin composition preferably contains at least one bifunctional or more polymerizable compound including two or more polymerizable groups, and more preferably contains at least one trifunctional or more polymerizable compound. From the viewpoint of forming a three-dimensional crosslinked structure to improve heat resistance, the photosensitive resin composition preferably contains at least one trifunctional or higher polymerizable compound. In addition, it may be a mixture of a bifunctional or lower polymerizable compound and a trifunctional or higher polymerizable compound.

作為聚合性化合物,包含具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之基團之化合物;具有羥甲基、烷氧甲基或醯氧甲基之化合物;環氧化合物;氧雜環丁烷化合物;苯并噁嗪化合物為較佳。As a polymerizable compound, a compound containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond; a compound having a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group or an oxymethyl group; an epoxy compound; an oxetane compound; a benzoxazine Compounds are preferred.

(包含具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之基團之化合物) 作為具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之基團,苯乙烯基、乙烯基、(甲基)丙烯醯基及(甲基)烯丙基為較佳,(甲基)丙烯醯基為更佳。(Compounds containing groups having ethylenically unsaturated bonds) As the groups having ethylenically unsaturated bonds, styryl, vinyl, (meth)acrylic and (meth)allyl groups are preferred , (Meth)acrylic acid group is more preferable.

作為包含具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之基團之化合物的具體例,可列舉不飽和羧酸(例如,丙烯酸、甲基丙烯酸、衣康酸、巴豆酸、異巴豆酸、馬來酸等)或其酯類、醯胺類及它們的多聚體,較佳為不飽和羧酸與多元醇的酯及不飽和羧酸與多元胺化合物的醯胺類、以及它們的多聚體。又,還可較佳地使用羥基或胺基、巰基等具有親和性取代基之不飽和羧酸酯或醯胺類與單官能或多官能異氰酸酯類或環氧類的加成反應物、與單官能或多官能的羧酸的脫水縮合反應物等。又,具有異氰酸酯基或環氧基等親電子性取代基之不飽和羧酸酯或醯胺類與單官能或多官能醇類、胺類、硫醇類的加成反應物及具有鹵素基或甲苯磺醯氧基等具有脫離性取代基之不飽和羧酸酯或醯胺類與單官能或多官能醇類、胺類、硫醇類的取代反應物亦為較佳。又,作為另一例,替代上述不飽和羧酸,能夠使用被不飽和膦酸、苯乙烯等乙烯基苯衍生物、乙烯醚、烯丙醚等取代之化合物組。As a specific example of a compound containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, unsaturated carboxylic acid (for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.) or its The esters, amides, and their multimers are preferably esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and polyhydric alcohols, and amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids and polyamine compounds, and their multimers. In addition, addition reactants of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides with monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanates or epoxy groups with affinity substituents such as hydroxyl, amine, and mercapto groups can also be preferably used, and mono Dehydration condensation reaction product of functional or polyfunctional carboxylic acid, etc. In addition, addition reactants of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having electrophilic substituents such as isocyanate groups or epoxy groups and monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohols, amines, and thiols, and halogen groups or Substitution reactants of unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having a detachable substituent such as toluene sulfonyloxy group and monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohols, amines, and thiols are also preferred. As another example, instead of the above-mentioned unsaturated carboxylic acid, a group of compounds substituted with unsaturated phosphonic acid, vinyl benzene derivatives such as styrene, vinyl ether, allyl ether, and the like can be used.

作為多元醇與不飽和羧酸的酯的單體的具體例,作為丙烯酸酯,有乙二醇二丙烯酸酯、三乙二醇二丙烯酸酯、1,3-丁二醇二丙烯酸酯、四亞甲基二醇二丙烯酸酯、丙二醇二丙烯酸酯、新戊二醇二丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三(丙烯醯氧基丙基)醚、三羥甲基乙烷三丙烯酸酯、己二醇二丙烯酸酯、1,4-環己二醇二丙烯酸酯、四乙二醇二丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇二丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇三丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇二丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇六丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇四丙烯酸酯、山梨糖醇三丙烯酸酯、山梨糖醇四丙烯酸酯、山梨糖醇五丙烯酸酯、山梨糖醇六丙烯酸酯、三(丙烯醯氧基乙基)異三聚氰酸酯、異三聚氰酸環氧乙烷改質三丙烯酸酯、聚酯丙烯酸酯寡聚物等。As specific examples of monomers of esters of polyhydric alcohols and unsaturated carboxylic acids, as acrylates, there are ethylene glycol diacrylate, triethylene glycol diacrylate, 1,3-butanediol diacrylate, and tetraethylene glycol diacrylate. Methyl glycol diacrylate, propylene glycol diacrylate, neopentyl glycol diacrylate, trimethylolpropane triacrylate, trimethylolpropane tris(acryloxypropyl) ether, trimethylol Ethane triacrylate, hexanediol diacrylate, 1,4-cyclohexanediol diacrylate, tetraethylene glycol diacrylate, pentaerythritol diacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate, dipentaerythritol diacrylate, two Pentaerythritol hexaacrylate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, sorbitol triacrylate, sorbitol tetraacrylate, sorbitol pentaacrylate, sorbitol hexaacrylate, tris(propylene oxyethyl) heterotrimerization Cyanate ester, isocyanuric acid ethylene oxide modified triacrylate, polyester acrylate oligomer, etc.

作為甲基丙烯酸酯,有四亞甲基二醇二甲基丙烯酸酯、三乙二醇二甲基丙烯酸酯、新戊二醇二甲基丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三甲基丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基乙烷三甲基丙烯酸酯、乙二醇二甲基丙烯酸酯、1,3-丁二醇二甲基丙烯酸酯、己二醇二甲基丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇二甲基丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇三甲基丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇四甲基丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇二甲基丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇六甲基丙烯酸酯、山梨糖醇三甲基丙烯酸酯、山梨糖醇四甲基丙烯酸酯、雙〔對(3-甲基丙烯醯氧基-2-羥基丙氧基)苯基〕二甲基甲烷、雙-〔對(甲基丙烯醯氧基乙氧基)苯基〕二甲基甲烷等。As methacrylates, there are tetramethylene glycol dimethacrylate, triethylene glycol dimethacrylate, neopentyl glycol dimethacrylate, trimethylolpropane trimethacrylate, Trimethylolethane trimethacrylate, ethylene glycol dimethacrylate, 1,3-butanediol dimethacrylate, hexanediol dimethacrylate, pentaerythritol dimethacrylate, Pentaerythritol trimethacrylate, pentaerythritol tetramethacrylate, dipentaerythritol dimethacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexamethacrylate, sorbitol trimethacrylate, sorbitol tetramethacrylate, double 〔 P(3-methacryloxy-2-hydroxypropoxy)phenyl]dimethylmethane, bis-[p(methacryloxyethoxy)phenyl]dimethylmethane, etc.

作為衣康酸酯,有乙二醇二衣康酸酯、丙二醇二衣康酸酯、1,3-丁二醇二衣康酸酯、1,4-丁二醇二衣康酸酯、四亞甲基二醇二衣康酸酯、季戊四醇二衣康酸酯、山梨糖醇四衣康酸酯等。As itaconates, there are ethylene glycol diitaconate, propylene glycol diitaconate, 1,3-butanediol diitaconate, 1,4-butanediol diitaconate, four Methylene glycol diitaconate, pentaerythritol diitaconate, sorbitol tetraitaconate, etc.

作為巴豆酸酯,有乙二醇二巴豆酸酯、四亞甲基二醇二巴豆酸酯、季戊四醇二巴豆酸酯、山梨糖醇四-二巴豆酸酯等。As the crotonate, there are ethylene glycol dicrotonate, tetramethylene glycol dicrotonate, pentaerythritol dicrotonate, sorbitol tetra-dicrotonate, and the like.

作為異巴豆酸酯,有乙二醇二異巴豆酸酯、季戊四醇二異巴豆酸酯、山梨糖醇四異巴豆酸酯等。As isocrotonic acid esters, there are ethylene glycol diisocrotonate, pentaerythritol diisocrotonate, sorbitol tetraisocrotonate, and the like.

作為馬來酸酯,有乙二醇二馬來酸酯、三乙二醇二馬來酸酯、季戊四醇二馬來酸酯、山梨糖醇四馬來酸酯等。Examples of maleic acid esters include ethylene glycol dimaleate, triethylene glycol dimaleate, pentaerythritol dimaleate, and sorbitol tetramaleate.

作為其他酯的例子,例如還能夠較佳地使用日本特公昭46-27926號公報、日本特公昭51-47334號公報、日本特開昭57-196231號公報中所記載之脂肪族醇系酯類,或日本特開昭59-5240號公報、日本特開昭59-5241號公報、日本特開平2-226149號公報中所記載之具有芳香族系骨架者、日本特開平1-165613號公報中所記載之含有胺基者等。As examples of other esters, for example, the aliphatic alcohol esters described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 46-27926, Japanese Patent Publication No. 51-47334, and Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 57-196231 can also be preferably used. , Or those having an aromatic skeleton described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 59-5240, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 59-5241, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2-226149, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 1-165613 Those that contain an amine group, etc. are described.

又,作為多元胺化合物與不飽和羧酸的醯胺的單體的具體例,有亞甲基雙-丙烯醯胺、亞甲基雙-甲基丙烯醯胺、1,6-六亞甲基雙-丙烯醯胺、1,6-六亞甲基雙-甲基丙烯醯胺、二乙三胺三丙烯醯胺、伸二甲苯基雙丙烯醯胺、伸二甲苯基雙甲基丙烯醯胺等。In addition, as specific examples of the monomer of the polyamine compound and the amide of the unsaturated carboxylic acid, there are methylene bis-acrylamide, methylene bis-methacrylamide, and 1,6-hexamethylene Bis-acrylamide, 1,6-hexamethylene bis-methacrylamide, diethylenetriamine triacrylamide, xylylene bisacrylamide, xylylene bismethacrylamide, etc.

作為其他較佳的醯胺系單體的例,可列舉日本特公昭54-21726號公報中所記載之具有伸環己基結構者。As an example of other preferable amide-based monomers, those having a cyclohexylene structure described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 54-21726 can be cited.

又,利用異氰酸酯與羥基的加成反應所製造的胺基甲酸酯系加成聚合性單體亦適宜,作為此種具體例,例如可列舉:日本特公昭48-41708號公報中所記載之於1分子中具有2個以上的異氰酸酯基的聚異氰酸酯化合物中對由下述式表示的含有羥基的乙烯基單體進行加成而成的1分子中含有2個以上的聚合性乙烯基的乙烯基胺基甲酸酯化合物等。 CH2 =C(R4 )COOCH2 CH(R5 )OH (其中,R4 及R5 表示H或CH3 。) 又,如日本特開昭51-37193號公報、日本特公平2-32293號公報、日本特公平2-16765號公報中所記載之丙烯酸胺基甲酸酯類,或日本特公昭58-49860號公報、日本特公昭56-17654號公報、日本特公昭62-39417號公報、日本特公昭62-39418號公報中所記載之具有環氧乙烷系骨架的胺基甲酸酯化合物類亦為較佳。In addition, a urethane-based addition polymerizable monomer produced by the addition reaction of an isocyanate and a hydroxyl group is also suitable. As such a specific example, for example, the one described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-41708 Ethylene containing two or more polymerizable vinyl groups in one molecule obtained by adding a hydroxyl-containing vinyl monomer represented by the following formula to a polyisocyanate compound having two or more isocyanate groups in one molecule Carbamate compounds and the like. CH 2 =C(R 4 )COOCH 2 CH(R 5 )OH (where R 4 and R 5 represent H or CH 3 .) Also, such as Japanese Patent Publication No. 51-37193 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2-32293 The urethane acrylates described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2-16765 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2-16765, or Japanese Patent Publication No. 58-49860, Japanese Patent Publication No. 56-17654, Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-39417, Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide-based skeleton described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-39418 are also preferable.

又,於本發明中,作為包含具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之基團之化合物,還能夠較佳地使用日本特開2009-288705號公報的0095~0108段中所記載之化合物。Furthermore, in the present invention, as the compound containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, the compound described in paragraphs 0095 to 0108 of JP 2009-288705 A can also be preferably used.

又,作為包含具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之基團之化合物,於常壓下具有100℃以上的沸點的化合物亦較佳。作為其例,可列舉:聚乙二醇單(甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚丙二醇單(甲基)丙烯酸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸苯氧基乙酯等單官能的丙烯酸酯或甲基丙烯酸酯;聚乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基乙烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、新戊二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇五(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇六(甲基)丙烯酸酯、己二醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三(丙烯醯氧基丙基)醚、三(丙烯醯氧基乙基)異三聚氰酸酯、甘油或三羥甲基乙烷等在多官能醇中加成環氧乙烷或環氧丙烷後進行(甲基)丙烯酸酯化而成者,如日本特公昭48-41708號公報、日本特公昭50-6034號公報、日本特開昭51-37193號公報中所記載之(甲基)丙烯酸胺基甲酸酯類,日本特開昭48-64183號公報、日本特公昭49-43191號公報、日本特公昭52-30490號公報中所記載之聚酯丙烯酸酯類,作為環氧樹脂與(甲基)丙烯酸的反應產物的環氧丙烯酸酯類等多官能的丙烯酸酯或甲基丙烯酸酯、以及該些的混合物。另外,日本特開2008-292970號公報的0254~0257段中所記載之化合物亦適宜。又,還能夠列舉使多官能羧酸與(甲基)丙烯酸縮水甘油酯等具有環狀醚基及乙烯性不飽和基的化合物進行反應而獲得的多官能(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。 又,作為其他較佳的包含具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之基團之聚合性化合物,還能夠使用日本特開2010-160418號公報、日本特開2010-129825號公報、日本專利第4364216號等中所記載之具有茀環,且具有2個以上的含有乙烯性不飽和鍵的基團的化合物或卡多(cardo)樹脂。 進而,作為其他例,還能夠列舉日本特公昭46-43946號公報、日本特公平1-40337號公報、日本特公平1-40336號公報中所記載之特定的不飽和化合物、或日本特開平2-25493號公報中所記載之乙烯基膦酸系化合物等。又,於某種情況下,適宜地使用日本特開昭61-22048號公報中所記載之含有全氟烷基的結構。進而,還能夠使用「Journal of the Adhesion Society of Japan」vol.20、No.7、300頁~308頁(1984年)中作為光硬化性單體及寡聚物所介紹者。Furthermore, as a compound containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, a compound having a boiling point of 100°C or higher under normal pressure is also preferable. Examples thereof include monofunctional acrylates or methacrylates such as polyethylene glycol mono(meth)acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono(meth)acrylate, and phenoxyethyl (meth)acrylate. ; Polyethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, trimethylolethane tri(meth)acrylate, neopentyl glycol di(meth)acrylate, pentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate, pentaerythritol four (Meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate, hexanediol (meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane tris(acryloxypropyl) ) Ether, tris (acryloyloxyethyl) isocyanurate, glycerin or trimethylol ethane, etc. are added to polyfunctional alcohols with ethylene oxide or propylene oxide for (meth)acrylic acid Esterification, such as (meth)acrylate urethanes described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-41708, Japanese Patent Publication No. 50-6034, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 51-37193, Japan The polyester acrylates described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 48-64183, Japanese Patent Publication No. 49-43191, and Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 52-30490 are used as reaction products of epoxy resin and (meth)acrylic acid. Polyfunctional acrylates or methacrylates, such as epoxy acrylates, and mixtures of these. In addition, the compounds described in paragraphs 0254 to 0257 of JP 2008-292970 A are also suitable. Moreover, the polyfunctional (meth)acrylate etc. which are obtained by making the compound which has a cyclic ether group and ethylenically unsaturated group, such as a polyfunctional carboxylic acid and glycidyl (meth)acrylate react, are mentioned. In addition, as other preferred polymerizable compounds containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-160418, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-129825, Japanese Patent No. 4364216, etc. can also be used. The compound or cardo resin described has a sulphur ring and two or more ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups. Furthermore, as other examples, specific unsaturated compounds described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 46-43946, Japanese Patent Publication No. 1-40337, Japanese Patent Publication No. 1-40336, or Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2 Vinylphosphonic acid-based compounds described in -25493 Gazette, etc. In addition, in certain cases, the perfluoroalkyl group-containing structure described in JP 61-22048 A can be suitably used. Furthermore, it is also possible to use those introduced as photocurable monomers and oligomers in "Journal of the Adhesion Society of Japan" vol. 20, No. 7, pages 300 to 308 (1984).

除上述以外,還能夠較佳地使用由下述(MO-1)~式(MO-5)表示之聚合性化合物。此外,式中,當T為氧基伸烷基時,碳原子側的末端與R鍵結。In addition to the above, polymerizable compounds represented by the following (MO-1) to (MO-5) can be preferably used. In addition, in the formula, when T is an oxyalkylene group, the end on the carbon atom side is bonded to R.

[化學式29]

Figure 02_image057
[Chemical formula 29]
Figure 02_image057

[化學式30]

Figure 02_image059
[Chemical formula 30]
Figure 02_image059

於上述的各式中,n為0~14的整數,m為1~8的整數。於分子內存在複數個的R、T可以相同亦可以不同。 由上述式(MO-1)~(MO-5)表示之聚合性化合物的每一個中,複數個R內的至少一個表示由-OC(=O)CH=CH2 或、-OC(=O)C(CH3 )=CH2 表示之基團。 於本發明中,作為由上述式(MO-1)~(MO-5)表示之包含具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之基團之化合物的具體例,能夠較佳地使用日本特開2007-269779號公報的0248~0251段中所記載之化合物。In each of the above formulas, n is an integer of 0-14, and m is an integer of 1-8. A plurality of R and T in the molecule may be the same or different. In each of the polymerizable compounds represented by the above-mentioned formulas (MO-1)~(MO-5), at least one of the plural Rs is represented by -OC (=O) CH=CH 2 or, -OC (=O ) C(CH 3 )=CH 2 represents a group. In the present invention, as a specific example of the compound containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond represented by the above formulas (MO-1) to (MO-5), Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2007-269779 can be preferably used The compound described in paragraphs 0248 to 0251 of the publication.

又,於日本特開平10-62986號公報中作為式(1)及(2)且與其具體例一同記載之如下化合物還能能用作聚合性化合物,該化合物是於多官能醇中加成環氧乙烷或環氧丙烷後進行(甲基)丙烯酸酯化而成的化合物。In addition, the following compounds described as formulas (1) and (2) in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 10-62986 and their specific examples can also be used as polymerizable compounds, which are ring-added to polyfunctional alcohols. A compound obtained by (meth)acrylic acid esterification after ethylene oxide or propylene oxide.

進而,還能夠採用日本特開2015-187211號公報的0104~0131段中所記載之化合物,並將該些內容編入本說明書中。尤其,作為較佳方式,例示所述公報的0128~0130段中所記載之化合物。Furthermore, the compounds described in paragraphs 0104 to 0131 of JP 2015-187211 A can also be used, and these contents can be incorporated in this specification. In particular, as a preferable aspect, the compounds described in paragraphs 0128 to 0130 of the above publication are exemplified.

作為包含具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之基團之化合物,二季戊四醇三丙烯酸酯(作為市售品為KAYARAD D-330;Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.製)、二季戊四醇四丙烯酸酯(作為市售品為KAYARAD D-320;Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.製)、二季戊四醇五(甲基)丙烯酸酯(作為市售品為KAYARAD D-310;Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.製)、二季戊四醇六(甲基)丙烯酸酯(作為市售品為KAYARAD DPHA;Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.製)及該些的(甲基)丙烯醯基經由乙二醇殘基、丙二醇殘基鍵結之結構為較佳。還能夠使用它們的寡聚物類型。 又,作為較佳的例,還可列舉上述式(MO-1)、式(MO-2)的季戊四醇衍生物和/或二季戊四醇衍生物。As a compound containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, dipentaerythritol triacrylate (as a commercial product is KAYARAD D-330; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (as a commercial product KAYARAD D-320; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate (as a commercially available product is KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa( Meth) acrylate (as a commercially available product is KAYARAD DPHA; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and these (meth)acrylic acid groups are bonded via ethylene glycol residues and propylene glycol residues. good. It is also possible to use their oligomer types. Moreover, as a preferable example, the pentaerythritol derivatives and/or dipentaerythritol derivatives of the above-mentioned formula (MO-1) and (MO-2) can also be cited.

作為聚合性化合物的市售品,例如可列舉Sartomer Company, Inc製的作為具有4個伸乙氧基鏈之4官能丙烯酸酯之SR-494、作為具有4個伸乙氧基鏈之2官能丙烯酸甲酯之Sartomer Company, Inc製SR-209、Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.製的作為具有6個伸戊氧基鏈之6官能丙烯酸酯之DPCA-60、作為具有3個異伸丁氧基鏈之3官能丙烯酸酯之TPA-330、胺基甲酸酯寡聚物UAS-10、UAB-140(Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp Co.,Ltd製)、NK酯M-40G、NK酯4G、NK酯M-9300、NK酯A-9300、UA-7200(Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co.,Ltd製)、DPHA-40H(Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.製)、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、AH-600、T-600、AI-600(Kyoeisha chemical Co.,Ltd.製)、BLEMMER PME400(NOF CORPORATION.製)等。Commercial products of polymerizable compounds include, for example, SR-494 manufactured by Sartomer Company, Inc as a 4-functional acrylate having 4 ethoxy chains, and SR-494 as a bifunctional acrylic having 4 ethoxy chains. SR-209 manufactured by Sartomer Company, Inc. of methyl ester, DPCA-60 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. as a 6-functional acrylate with 6 pentoxy chains, as DPCA-60 with 3 isobutylene groups Trifunctional acrylate TPA-330, urethane oligomer UAS-10, UAB-140 (manufactured by Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp Co., Ltd), NK ester M-40G, NK ester 4G, NK ester M- 9300, NK ester A-9300, UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH -600, T-600, AI-600 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), BLEMMER PME400 (manufactured by NOF CORPORATION), etc.

作為包含具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之基團之化合物,如日本特公昭48-41708號公報、日本特開昭51-37193號公報、日本特公平2-32293號公報、日本特公平2-16765號公報中所記載之那樣的胺基甲酸酯丙烯酸酯類、日本特公昭58-49860號公報、日本特公昭56-17654號公報、日本特公昭62-39417號公報、日本特公昭62-39418號公報中所記載之具有環氧乙烷系骨架之胺基甲酸酯合物類亦為較佳。進而,作為聚合性化合物,還能夠使用日本特開昭63-277653號公報、日本特開昭63-260909號公報、日本特開平1-105238號公報中所記載之於分子內具有胺基結構或硫化物結構之加成聚合性單體類。As a compound containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, such as Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-41708, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 51-37193, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2-32293, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2-16765 Urethane acrylates as described in the gazette, Japanese Patent Publication No. 58-49860, Japanese Patent Publication No. 56-17654, Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-39417, Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-39418 The urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide-based skeleton described in the gazette are also preferable. Furthermore, as the polymerizable compound, those having an amino group structure in the molecule or those described in JP-A 63-277653, JP-A 63-260909, and JP-A 1-105238 can also be used. Sulfide structure of addition polymerizable monomers.

包含具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之基團之化合物可以是具有羧基、磺酸基、磷酸基等酸基之多官能單體。具有酸基之多官能單體中,脂肪族多羥基化合物與不飽和羧酸的酯為較佳,使脂肪族多羥基化合物的未反應的羥基與非芳香族羧酸酐反應而具有酸基之多官能單體為更佳。特佳為使脂肪族多羥基化合物的未反應的羥基與非芳香族羧酸酐反應而具有酸基之多官能單體中,脂肪族多羥基化合物是季戊四醇和/或二季戊四醇。作為市售品,例如,作為TOAGOSEI CO., LTD.製多元酸改性的丙烯酸類寡聚物,可列舉M-510、M-520等。 具有酸基之多官能單體可以單獨使用一種,亦可以混合使用兩種以上。又,依需要,可組合使用不具有酸基之多官能單體和具有酸基之多官能單體。 作為具有酸基之多官能單體的較佳的酸值是0.1~40mgKOH/g,特佳為5~30mgKOH/g。多官能單體的酸值只要在上述範圍內,則製造或操作性優異,進而顯影性優異。又,聚合性亦良好。The compound containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond may be a multifunctional monomer having an acid group such as a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group. Among the polyfunctional monomers having acid groups, esters of aliphatic polyhydroxy compounds and unsaturated carboxylic acids are preferred. The unreacted hydroxyl groups of the aliphatic polyhydroxy compounds react with non-aromatic carboxylic anhydrides to have many acid groups Functional monomers are more preferable. Particularly preferably, among the polyfunctional monomers having an acid group by reacting unreacted hydroxyl groups of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound with a non-aromatic carboxylic anhydride, the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is pentaerythritol and/or dipentaerythritol. As a commercially available product, for example, as a polyacid-modified acrylic oligomer manufactured by TOAGOSEI CO., LTD., M-510, M-520, and the like can be cited. The polyfunctional monomer having an acid group may be used singly or in combination of two or more. Furthermore, if necessary, a multifunctional monomer having no acid group and a multifunctional monomer having an acid group can be used in combination. The preferable acid value as a polyfunctional monomer having an acid group is 0.1-40 mgKOH/g, particularly preferably 5-30 mgKOH/g. As long as the acid value of the polyfunctional monomer is within the above-mentioned range, the production and handling properties are excellent, and furthermore, the developability is excellent. In addition, the polymerizability is also good.

從良好的聚合性和耐熱性的觀點考慮,包含具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之基團之化合物的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分是1~50質量%為較佳。下限是5質量%以上為更佳。上限是30質量%以下為更佳。包含具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之基團之化合物可以單獨使用一種,亦可以混合使用兩種以上。 又,樹脂與包含具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之基團之化合物的質量比例(樹脂/聚合性化合物)是98/2~10/90為較佳,95/5~30/70為更佳,90/10~50/50為最佳。樹脂與包含具有乙烯性不飽和鍵之基團之化合物的質量比例只要在上述範圍內,則能夠形成聚合性及耐熱性更加優異之硬化膜。From the viewpoint of good polymerizability and heat resistance, the content of the compound containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferably 1 to 50% by mass relative to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition. The lower limit is more preferably 5% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 30% by mass or less. The compound containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond may be used singly or in combination of two or more. In addition, the mass ratio of the resin to the compound containing the ethylenically unsaturated bond (resin/polymerizable compound) is preferably 98/2 to 10/90, more preferably 95/5 to 30/70, and 90 /10~50/50 is the best. As long as the mass ratio of the resin and the compound containing a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is within the above range, a cured film with more excellent polymerizability and heat resistance can be formed.

(具有羥甲基、烷氧甲基或醯氧甲基之化合物) 作為具有羥甲基、烷氧甲基或醯氧甲基之化合物,由下述式(AM1)表示之化合物為較佳。(The compound having a hydroxymethyl group, an alkoxymethyl group, or an oxymethyl group) As a compound having a hydroxymethyl group, an alkoxymethyl group or an oxymethyl group, a compound represented by the following formula (AM1) is preferred.

式(AM1) [化學式31]

Figure 02_image061
(式中,t表示1~20的整數,R4 表示碳數1~200的t價有機基團,R5 表示由下述式(AM2)或下述式(AM3)表示之基團。)Formula (AM1) [Chemical Formula 31]
Figure 02_image061
(In the formula, t represents an integer from 1 to 20, R 4 represents a t-valent organic group having 1 to 200 carbon atoms, and R 5 represents a group represented by the following formula (AM2) or the following formula (AM3).)

式(AM2)式(AM3) [化學式32]

Figure 02_image063
(式中,R6 表示羥基或碳數1~10的有機基團。)Formula (AM2) Formula (AM3) [Chemical formula 32]
Figure 02_image063
(In the formula, R 6 represents a hydroxyl group or an organic group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.)

相對於樹脂100質量份,由式(AM1)表示之化合物是5質量份以上且40質量份以下為較佳。進一步較佳為10質量份以上且35質量份以下。又,所有聚合性化合物中含有10質量%以上且90質量%以下的由下述式(AM4)表示之化合物,所有熱交聯劑中含有10質量%以上且90質量%以下的由下述式(AM5)表示之化合物亦為較佳。It is preferable that the compound represented by formula (AM1) is 5 parts by mass or more and 40 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin. More preferably, it is 10 parts by mass or more and 35 parts by mass or less. In addition, all polymerizable compounds contain 10% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less of the compound represented by the following formula (AM4), and all thermal crosslinking agents contain 10% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less by the following formula The compound represented by (AM5) is also preferred.

式(AM4) [化學式33]

Figure 02_image065
(式中,R4 表示碳數1~200的2價有機基團,R5 表示由下述式(AM2)或下述式(AM3)表示之基團。)Formula (AM4) [Chemical Formula 33]
Figure 02_image065
(In the formula, R 4 represents a divalent organic group having 1 to 200 carbon atoms, and R 5 represents a group represented by the following formula (AM2) or the following formula (AM3).)

式(AM5) [化學式34]

Figure 02_image067
(式中,u表示3~8的整數,R4 表示碳數1~200的u價有機基團,R5 表示由下述式(AM2)或下述式(AM3)表示之基團。)Formula (AM5) [Chemical Formula 34]
Figure 02_image067
(In the formula, u represents an integer of 3 to 8, R 4 represents a u-valent organic group having 1 to 200 carbon atoms, and R 5 represents a group represented by the following formula (AM2) or the following formula (AM3).)

式(AM2)式(AM3) [化學式35]

Figure 02_image069
(式中,R6 表示羥基或碳數1~10的有機基團。)Formula (AM2) Formula (AM3) [Chemical formula 35]
Figure 02_image069
(In the formula, R 6 represents a hydroxyl group or an organic group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.)

藉由設為該範圍,在凹凸的基板上形成感光性樹脂組成物層時,產生龜裂之情況進一步減少。又,能夠具有圖案加工性優異,5%質量減少溫度成為350℃以上,更佳為成為380℃以上的較高的耐熱性。作為由式(AM4)表示之化合物的具體例,可列舉46DMOC、46DMOEP(以上為產品名,ASAHI YUKIZAI CORPORATION製)、DML-MBPC、DML-MBOC、DML-OCHP、DML-PCHP、DML-PC、DML-PTBP、DML-34X、DML-EP、DML-POP、dimethylolBisOC-P、DML-PFP、DML-PSBP、DML-MTrisPC(以上為產品名,Honshu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.製)、NIKALAC MX-290(以上為產品名,Sanwa Chemical Co., Ltd.製)、2,6-二甲氧基甲基-4-第三丁基苯酚(2,6-dimethoxymethyl-4-t-buthylphenol)、2,6-二甲氧基甲基-對甲酚(2,6-dimethoxymethyl-p-cresol)、2,6乙醯氧基甲基-對甲酚(2,6-diacethoxymethyl-p-cresol)等。By setting it as this range, when the photosensitive resin composition layer is formed on the uneven|corrugated board|substrate, the occurrence of cracks is further reduced. In addition, it can have excellent pattern processability, and the 5% mass reduction temperature is 350°C or higher, more preferably 380°C or higher, and has high heat resistance. Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (AM4) include 46DMOC, 46DMOEP (the above are product names, manufactured by ASAHI YUKIZAI CORPORATION), DML-MBPC, DML-MBOC, DML-OCHP, DML-PCHP, DML-PC, DML-PTBP, DML-34X, DML-EP, DML-POP, dimethylolBisOC-P, DML-PFP, DML-PSBP, DML-MTrisPC (the above are product names, manufactured by Honshu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), NIKALAC MX -290 (The above is the product name, manufactured by Sanwa Chemical Co., Ltd.), 2,6-dimethoxymethyl-4-t-buthylphenol, 2,6-Dimethoxymethyl-p-cresol (2,6-dimethoxymethyl-p-cresol), 2,6-acetoxymethyl-p-cresol (2,6-diacethoxymethyl-p-cresol) Wait.

又,作為由式(AM5)表示之化合物的具體例,可列舉TriML-P、TriML-35XL、TML-HQ、TML-BP、TML-pp-BPF、TML-BPA、TMOM-BP、HML-TPPHBA、HML-TPHAP、HMOM-TPPHBA、HMOM-TPHAP(以上為產品名,Honshu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.製)、TM-BIP-A(商品名,ASAHI YUKIZAI CORPORATION製)、NIKALAC MX-280、NIKALAC MX-270、NIKALAC MW-100LM(以上為產品名,Sanwa Chemical Co., Ltd.製)。Also, as specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (AM5), TriML-P, TriML-35XL, TML-HQ, TML-BP, TML-pp-BPF, TML-BPA, TMOM-BP, HML-TPPHBA , HML-TPHAP, HMOM-TPPHBA, HMOM-TPHAP (the above are product names, manufactured by Honshu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), TM-BIP-A (trade name, manufactured by ASAHI YUKIZAI CORPORATION), NIKALAC MX-280, NIKALAC MX-270, NIKALAC MW-100LM (the above are product names, manufactured by Sanwa Chemical Co., Ltd.).

<<<光聚合起始劑>>> 感光性樹脂組成物亦可以含有光聚合起始劑。尤其,藉由感光性樹脂組成物包含光自由基聚合起始劑,將感光性樹脂組成物應用於半導體晶圓等基板而形成感光性樹脂組成物層之後,照射光,藉此發生因自由基引起之硬化,並能夠降低光照射部中的溶解性。因此,例如具有如下優點,亦即經由具有僅遮蔽電極部之圖案之光遮罩對感光性樹脂組成物層進行曝光,藉此能夠依照電極圖案來輕鬆地製作溶解性不同之區域。<<<Photopolymerization initiator>>> The photosensitive resin composition may contain a photopolymerization initiator. In particular, since the photosensitive resin composition contains a photoradical polymerization initiator, the photosensitive resin composition is applied to a substrate such as a semiconductor wafer to form a photosensitive resin composition layer, and then light is irradiated to generate free radicals. It causes hardening and can reduce the solubility in the light-irradiated part. Therefore, for example, there is an advantage that by exposing the photosensitive resin composition layer through a light mask having a pattern for shielding only the electrode portion, it is possible to easily create regions with different solubility in accordance with the electrode pattern.

作為光聚合起始劑,只要具有開始進行聚合性化合物的聚合反應(交聯反應)之能力,則並無特別限制,能夠從公知的光聚合起始劑中適當選擇。例如,從紫外線區域相對於可見區域的光線具有感光性者為較佳。又,可以是與光激發之增感劑產生一些作用,並生成活性自由基之活性劑。 光聚合起始劑至少含有一種於約300~800nm(較佳為330~500nm)的範圍內至少具有約50莫耳吸光係數之化合物為較佳。化合物的莫耳吸光係數能夠利用公知的方法來測定。具體而言,例如,藉由紫外可見分光光度計(Varian公司製Cary-5 spectrophotometer),並利用乙酸乙酯溶劑而於0.01g/L的濃度下進行測定為較佳。The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to start the polymerization reaction (crosslinking reaction) of the polymerizable compound, and it can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, it is preferable that the light from the ultraviolet region has sensitivity to the visible region. In addition, it can be an active agent that interacts with a light-excited sensitizer and generates active free radicals. It is preferable that the photopolymerization initiator contains at least one compound having at least about 50 molar absorption coefficient in the range of about 300 to 800 nm (preferably 330 to 500 nm). The molar absorption coefficient of the compound can be measured by a known method. Specifically, for example, it is preferable to measure with an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian) using an ethyl acetate solvent at a concentration of 0.01 g/L.

作為光聚合起始劑,能夠無限制地使用公知的化合物,例如,可列舉鹵化烴衍生物(例如具有三嗪骨架者、具有噁二唑骨架者、具有三鹵甲基者等)、醯基氧化膦等醯基膦化合物、六芳基聯咪唑、肟衍生物等肟化合物、有機過氧化物、硫化合物、酮化合物、芳香族鎓鹽、酮肟醚、胺基苯乙酮化合物、羥基苯乙酮、偶氮系化合物、疊氮基化合物、茂金屬化合物、有機硼化合物、鐵芳烴錯合物等。As the photopolymerization initiator, known compounds can be used without limitation, for example, halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, those having a triazine skeleton, those having an oxadiazole skeleton, those having a trihalomethyl group, etc.), acyl groups Phosphine compounds such as phosphine oxide, oxime compounds such as hexaarylbiimidazole, oxime derivatives, organic peroxides, sulfur compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, aminoacetophenone compounds, hydroxybenzene Ethyl ketones, azo compounds, azide compounds, metallocene compounds, organoboron compounds, iron arene complexes, etc.

作為具有三嗪骨架的鹵化烴化合物,例如可列舉:若林等著,「日本化學學會通報(Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan)」,42、2924(1969)中所記載之化合物,英國專利1388492號說明書中所記載之化合物,日本特開昭53-133428號公報中所記載之化合物,德國專利3337024號說明書中所記載之化合物,F.C.謝弗(F. C. Schaefer)等的「有機化學期刊(J. Org. Chem.)」,29、1527(1964)中所記載之化合物,日本特開昭62-58241號公報中所記載之化合物,日本特開平5-281728號公報中所記載之化合物,日本特開平5-34920號公報中所記載之化合物,美國專利第4212976號說明書中所記載之化合物等。Examples of halogenated hydrocarbon compounds having a triazine skeleton include compounds described in Wakabayashi et al., "Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan", 42, 2924 (1969), British Patent No. 1388492 The compound described in the specification, the compound described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 53-133428, the compound described in the specification of German Patent No. 3337024, FC Schaefer et al. "Journal of Organic Chemistry (J. Org) Chem.)", 29, 1527 (1964), the compound described in JP-A 62-58241, the compound described in JP 5-281728, JP-H The compound described in 5-34920 gazette, the compound described in the specification of U.S. Patent No. 4,212,976, and the like.

作為美國專利第4212976號說明書中所記載之化合物,例如可列舉:具有噁二唑骨架的化合物(例如2-三氯甲基-5-苯基-1,3,4-噁二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-(4-氯苯基)-1,3,4-噁二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-(1-萘基)-1,3,4-噁二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-(2-萘基)-1,3,4-噁二唑、2-三溴甲基-5-苯基-1,3,4-噁二唑、2-三溴甲基-5-(2-萘基)-1,3,4-噁二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-苯乙烯基-1,3,4-噁二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-(4-氯苯乙烯基)-1,3,4-噁二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-(4-甲氧基苯乙烯基)-1,3,4-噁二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-(4-正丁氧基苯乙烯基)-1,3,4-噁二唑、2-三溴甲基-5-苯乙烯基-1,3,4-噁二唑等)等。As the compound described in the specification of U.S. Patent No. 4212976, for example, a compound having an oxadiazole skeleton (for example, 2-trichloromethyl-5-phenyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2- Trichloromethyl-5-(4-chlorophenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5-(1-naphthyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole , 2-Trichloromethyl-5-(2-naphthyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-tribromomethyl-5-phenyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2 -Tribromomethyl-5-(2-naphthyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5-styryl-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2- Trichloromethyl-5-(4-chlorostyryl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5-(4-methoxystyryl)-1,3, 4-oxadiazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5-(4-n-butoxystyryl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole, 2-tribromomethyl-5-styryl- 1,3,4-oxadiazole etc.) etc.

又,作為上述以外的光聚合起始劑,例示日本特開2015-087611號公報的0086段中所記載之化合物、日本特開昭53-133428號公報、日本特公昭57-1819號公報、日本特公昭57-6096號公報及美國專利第3615455號說明書中所記載之化合物等,並將該些內容編入本說明書中。In addition, examples of photopolymerization initiators other than the above include the compounds described in paragraph 0086 of Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-087611, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 53-133428, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 57-1819, and Japan. The compounds described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 57-6096 and US Patent No. 3615455 are incorporated into this specification.

作為酮化合物,例如,例示日本特開2015-087611號公報的0087段中所記載之化合物,並將該內容編入本說明書中。 市售品中亦可較佳地使用KAYACUREDETX(Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.製)。As the ketone compound, for example, the compound described in paragraph 0087 of JP-A-2015-087611 is exemplified, and the content is incorporated in this specification. KAYACURE DETX (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) can also be preferably used among commercially available products.

作為光聚合起始劑,還能夠較佳地使用羥基苯乙酮化合物、胺基苯乙酮化合物及醯基膦化合物。更具體而言,例如,還能夠使用日本特開平10-291969號公報中所記載之胺基苯乙酮系起始劑、日本專利第4225898號中所記載之醯基氧化膦系起始劑。 作為羥基苯乙酮系起始劑,能夠使用IRGACURE-184(IRGACURE為註冊商標)、DAROCUR-1173、IRGACURE-500、IRGACURE-2959、IRGACURE-127(產品名:均為BASF公司製)。 作為胺基苯乙酮系起始劑,能夠使用作為市售品之IRGACURE-907、IRGACURE-369及IRGACURE-379(產品名:均為BASF公司製)。 作為胺基苯乙酮系起始劑,還能夠使用極大吸收波長與365nm或405nm等波長匹配之日本特開2009-191179號公報中所記載之化合物。 作為醯基膦系起始劑,可列舉2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基-二苯基-膦氧化物等。又,能夠使用作為市售品之IRGACURE-819或IRGACURE-TPO(產品名:均為BASF公司製)。 作為茂金屬化合物,例示IRGACURE-784(BASF公司製)等。As the photopolymerization initiator, hydroxyacetophenone compounds, aminoacetophenone compounds, and phosphine compounds can also be preferably used. More specifically, for example, the aminoacetophenone-based initiator described in JP-A No. 10-291969 and the phosphine oxide-based initiator described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898 can also be used. As the hydroxyacetophenone-based initiator, IRGACURE-184 (IRGACURE is a registered trademark), DAROCUR-1173, IRGACURE-500, IRGACURE-2959, and IRGACURE-127 (product names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used. As the aminoacetophenone-based initiator, IRGACURE-907, IRGACURE-369, and IRGACURE-379 (product names: all manufactured by BASF Corporation), which are commercially available products, can be used. As the aminoacetophenone-based initiator, it is also possible to use the compound described in JP 2009-191179 A whose maximum absorption wavelength matches the wavelength of 365 nm or 405 nm. Examples of the phosphine-based initiator include 2,4,6-trimethylbenzyl-diphenyl-phosphine oxide. In addition, IRGACURE-819 or IRGACURE-TPO (product name: both manufactured by BASF Corporation), which are commercially available products, can be used. As the metallocene compound, IRGACURE-784 (manufactured by BASF Corporation) and the like are exemplified.

作為光聚合起始劑,更佳為列舉肟化合物。藉由使用肟化合物,能夠進一步有效地提高曝光寬容度。肟酯系化合物中,曝光寬容度(曝光餘量)較廣,且還作為熱鹼產生劑而發揮功能,因此為特佳。 作為肟化合物的具體例,能夠使用日本特開2001-233842號公報中所記載之化合物、日本特開2000-80068號公報中所記載之化合物、日本特開2006-342166號公報中所記載之化合物。 作為較佳的肟化合物,例如可列舉下述化合物、3-苯甲醯氧基亞胺基丁烷-2-酮、3-乙醯氧基亞胺基丁烷-2-酮、3-丙醯氧基亞胺基丁烷-2-酮、2-乙醯氧基亞胺基戊烷-3-酮、2-乙醯氧基亞胺基-1-苯基丙烷-1-酮、2-苯甲醯氧基亞胺基-1-苯基丙烷-1-酮、3-(4-甲苯磺醯氧基)亞胺基丁烷-2-酮、以及2-乙氧基羰氧基亞胺基-1-苯基丙烷-1-酮等。 [化學式36]

Figure 02_image071
As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound is more preferable. By using an oxime compound, the exposure latitude can be further effectively improved. Among the oxime ester-based compounds, the exposure latitude (exposure margin) is relatively wide, and it also functions as a thermal base generator, so it is particularly preferred. As specific examples of the oxime compound, the compounds described in JP 2001-233842, the compounds described in JP 2000-80068, and the compounds described in JP 2006-342166 can be used. . As preferred oxime compounds, for example, the following compounds, 3-benzyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-propane Acetyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentane-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2 -Benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3-(4-toluenesulfonyloxy)iminobutan-2-one, and 2-ethoxycarbonyloxy Imino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, etc. [Chemical formula 36]
Figure 02_image071

作為肟化合物,可列舉J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年)pp.1653-1660、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年)pp.156-162、Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology(1995年)pp.202-232的各文獻中所記載之化合物、日本特開2000-66385號公報中所記載之化合物、日本特開2000-80068號公報、日本特表2004-534797號公報、日本特開2006-342166號公報、國際公開WO2015/036910號公報的各公報中所記載之化合物等。 市售品中,還可較佳地使用IRGACURE OXE 01、IRGACURE OXE 02、IRGACURE OXE 03、IRGACURE OXE 04(以上為BASF公司製)、ADEKA OPTOMERN-1919(ADEKA CORPORATION製、日本特開2012-14052號公報中所記載之光聚合起始劑2)。又,能夠使用TR-PBG-304(常州強力電子新材料有限公司製)、ADEKAARKLS NCI-831及ADEKAARKLS NCI-930(ADEKACorporation製)。又,還能夠使用DFI-091(DAITO CHEMIX Co., Ltd.製)。As the oxime compound, various documents of JCS Perkin II (1979) pp.1653-1660, JCS Perkin II (1979) pp.156-162, Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995) pp.202-232 can be cited The compounds described in JP 2000-66385, JP 2000-80068, JP 2004-534797, JP 2006-342166, International Publication WO2015 /036910 Bulletin, the compound described in each bulletin. Among the commercially available products, IRGACURE OXE 01, IRGACURE OXE 02, IRGACURE OXE 03, IRGACURE OXE 04 (the above are made by BASF), ADEKA OPTOMERN-1919 (made by ADEKA CORPORATION, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2012-14052 The photopolymerization initiator described in the gazette 2). In addition, TR-PBG-304 (manufactured by Changzhou Qiangli Electronic New Materials Co., Ltd.), ADEKAARKLS NCI-831 and ADEKAARKLS NCI-930 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) can be used. In addition, DFI-091 (manufactured by DAITO CHEMIX Co., Ltd.) can also be used.

又,可以使用於咔唑環的N位連結有肟之日本特表2009-519904號公報中所記載之化合物、於二苯甲酮部位導入有雜取代基之美國專利7626957號公報中所記載之化合物、於色素部位導入有硝基之日本特開2010-15025號公報及美國專利公開2009-292039號公報中所記載之化合物、國際公開WO2009-131189號中所記載之酮肟化合物、於分子內包含三嗪骨架和肟骨架之美國專利7556910號公報中所記載之化合物、於405nm具有最大吸收且相對於g射線光源具有良好的感度之日本特開2009-221114號公報中所記載之化合物等。 又,亦以能夠較佳地使用日本特開2007-231000號公報及日本特開2007-322744號公報中所記載之環狀肟化合物。從具有較高的光吸收性且高感度化的觀點考慮,於環狀肟化合物中,尤其日本特開2010-32985號公報、日本特開2010-185072號公報中所記載之縮合於咔唑色素之環狀肟化合物亦為較佳。 又,還能夠較佳地使用作為於肟化合物的特定部位具有不飽和鍵之化合物之日本特開2009-242469號公報中所記載之化合物。 進而,又,還能夠使用具有氟原子之肟化合物。作為該種肟化合物的具體例,可列舉日本特開2010-262028號公報中所記載之化合物、日本特表2014-500852號公報的0345段中所記載之化合物24、36~40、日本特開2013-164471號公報的0101段中所記載之化合物(C-3)等。作為具體例,可列舉以下化合物。 [化學式37]

Figure 02_image073
關於最佳之肟化合物,可列舉日本特開2007-269779號公報中所示出之具有特定取代基之肟化合物、日本特開2009-191061號公報中所示出之具有硫芳基之肟化合物等。In addition, it is possible to use the compound described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2009-519904 with an oxime linked to the N position of the carbazole ring, and the compound described in U.S. Patent No. 7626957 in which a heterosubstituent is introduced at the benzophenone site. The compound, the compound described in JP 2010-15025 A and U.S. Patent Publication No. 2009-292039, the ketoxime compound described in International Publication WO2009-131189, in which the nitro group is introduced into the pigment site, in the molecule The compound described in U.S. Patent No. 7556910 containing a triazine skeleton and an oxime skeleton, the compound described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-221114, etc. having a maximum absorption at 405 nm and having good sensitivity to a g-ray light source. In addition, it is also possible to preferably use the cyclic oxime compounds described in JP 2007-231000 A and JP 2007-322744 A. From the viewpoint of high light absorption and high sensitivity, among the cyclic oxime compounds, in particular, the condensed carbazole dyes described in JP 2010-32985 A and 2010-185072 The cyclic oxime compound is also preferred. In addition, the compound described in JP 2009-242469 A, which is a compound having an unsaturated bond at a specific site of the oxime compound, can also be preferably used. Furthermore, an oxime compound having a fluorine atom can also be used. Specific examples of such oxime compounds include the compounds described in JP 2010-262028 A, the compounds 24, 36-40, and the compounds described in paragraph 0345 of JP 2014-500852 A. The compound (C-3) and the like described in paragraph 0101 of the 2013-164471 Bulletin. As specific examples, the following compounds can be cited. [Chemical formula 37]
Figure 02_image073
As for the best oxime compound, oxime compounds having specific substituents shown in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2007-269779 and oxime compounds having sulfur aryl groups shown in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2009-191061 can be cited. Wait.

從曝光感度的觀點考慮,光聚合起始劑是選自包括由三鹵甲基三嗪化合物、苄基二甲基縮酮化合物、α-羥基酮化合物、α-胺基酮化合物、醯基膦化合物、氧化膦化合物、茂金屬化合物、肟化合物、三烯丙基咪唑二聚體、鎓鹽化合物、苯并噻唑化合物、二苯甲酮化合物、苯乙酮化合物及其衍生物、環戊二烯-苯-鐵錯合物及其鹽、鹵甲基噁二唑化合物、3-芳基取代香豆素化合物之組中之化合物。 更佳的光聚合起始劑是選自包括三鹵甲基三嗪化合物、α-胺基酮化合物、醯基膦化合物、氧化膦化合物、茂金屬化合物、肟化合物、三芳基咪唑二聚體、鎓鹽化合物、二苯甲酮化合物、苯乙酮化合物,特佳為選自由三鹵甲基三嗪化合物、α-胺基酮化合物、肟化合物、三芳基咪唑二聚體、二苯甲酮化合物之組中之至少一種化合物為進一步較佳,使用茂金屬化合物或肟化合物為進一步較佳,肟化合物為進一步特佳。 又,光聚合起始劑還能夠使用二苯甲酮、N,N’-四甲基-4,4’-二胺基二苯甲酮(米氏酮)等N,N’-四烷基-4,4’-二胺基二苯甲酮,2-苄基-2-二甲基胺基-1-(4-嗎啉基苯基)-丁酮-1、2-甲基-1-[4-(甲硫基)苯基]-2-嗎啉基-丙酮-1等芳香族酮、烷基蒽醌等與芳香環進行縮環而成的醌類、安息香烷基醚等安息香醚化合物、安息香、烷基安息香等安息香化合物、苄基二甲基縮酮等苄基衍生物等。 又,還能夠使用由下述式(I)表示之化合物。 [化學式38]

Figure 02_image075
式(I)中,R50 是碳數1~20的烷基;因1個以上的氧原子而中斷之碳數2~20的烷基;碳數1~12的烷氧基;苯基;由碳數1~20的烷基、碳數1~12的烷氧基、鹵素原子、環戊基、環己基、碳數1~12的烯基、因1個以上的氧原子而中斷之碳數2~18的烷基及碳數1~4的烷基中的至少一個取代之苯基或聯苯基,R51 是由式(II)表示之基團,或者是與R50 相同的基團,R52 ~R54 各自獨立地是碳數1~12的烷基、碳數1~12的烷氧基或鹵素。 [化學式39]
Figure 02_image077
式中,R55 ~R57 與上述式(I)的R52 ~R54 相同。From the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, the photopolymerization initiator is selected from the group consisting of trihalomethyl triazine compounds, benzyl dimethyl ketal compounds, α-hydroxy ketone compounds, α-amino ketone compounds, and phosphine compounds. Compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimers, onium salt compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds and their derivatives, cyclopentadiene -Benzene-iron complexes and their salts, halomethyl oxadiazole compounds, and 3-aryl substituted coumarin compounds. More preferred photopolymerization initiators are selected from the group consisting of trihalomethyl triazine compounds, α-amino ketone compounds, phosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triarylimidazole dimers, Onium salt compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds, particularly preferably selected from trihalomethyl triazine compounds, α-amino ketone compounds, oxime compounds, triaryl imidazole dimers, and benzophenone compounds At least one compound in the group is more preferred, a metallocene compound or an oxime compound is more preferred, and an oxime compound is even more particularly preferred. In addition, the photopolymerization initiator can also use N,N'-tetraalkyl groups such as benzophenone and N,N'-tetramethyl-4,4'-diaminobenzophenone (Michler’s ketone). -4,4'-Diaminobenzophenone, 2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1-(4-morpholinylphenyl)-butanone-1, 2-methyl-1 -[4-(Methylthio)phenyl]-2-morpholinyl-acetone-1 and other aromatic ketones, alkylanthraquinones and other quinones condensed with aromatic rings, benzoin such as alkyl ethers of benzoin Benzoin compounds such as ether compounds, benzoin and alkyl benzoin, benzyl derivatives such as benzyl dimethyl ketal, etc. In addition, a compound represented by the following formula (I) can also be used. [Chemical formula 38]
Figure 02_image075
In formula (I), R 50 is an alkyl group with 1 to 20 carbons; an alkyl group with 2 to 20 carbons interrupted by more than one oxygen atom; an alkoxy group with 1 to 12 carbons; a phenyl group; Alkyl with 1 to 20 carbons, alkoxy with 1 to 12 carbons, halogen atom, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, alkenyl with 1 to 12 carbons, carbon interrupted by more than one oxygen atom A phenyl group or a biphenyl group substituted with at least one of an alkyl group having 2 to 18 and an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbons, R 51 is a group represented by formula (II), or the same group as R 50 Group, R 52 to R 54 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbons, an alkoxy group having 1 to 12 carbons, or halogen. [Chemical formula 39]
Figure 02_image077
In the formula, R 55 to R 57 are the same as R 52 to R 54 in the above formula (I).

又,光聚合起始劑還能夠使用國際公開WO2015/125469號的0048~0055段中所記載之化合物。In addition, as the photopolymerization initiator, the compounds described in paragraphs 0048 to 0055 of International Publication WO2015/125469 can also be used.

當感光性樹脂組成物包含光聚合起始劑時,光聚合起始劑的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分是0.1~30質量%為較佳,更佳為0.1~20質量%,進一步較佳為0.1~10質量%。 光聚合起始劑可以僅使用一種,亦可以使用兩種以上。當光聚合起始劑是兩種以上時,其合計為上述範圍為較佳。When the photosensitive resin composition contains a photopolymerization initiator, the content of the photopolymerization initiator relative to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 0.1-30% by mass, more preferably 0.1-20% by mass , More preferably, it is 0.1-10 mass %. Only one type of photopolymerization initiator may be used, or two or more types may be used. When there are two or more photopolymerization initiators, it is preferable that the total amount is in the above-mentioned range.

<<<遷移抑制劑>>> 感光性樹脂組成物還包含遷移抑制劑為較佳。藉由包含遷移抑制劑,能夠有效地抑制源自金屬層(金屬配線)之金屬離子轉移到感光性樹脂組成物層內。 作為遷移抑制劑,並無特別限制,可列舉具有雜環(吡咯環、呋喃環、噻吩環、咪唑環、噁唑環、噻唑環、吡唑環、異噁唑環、異噻唑環、四唑環、吡啶環、噠嗪環、嘧啶環、吡嗪環、哌啶環、哌嗪環、嗎啉環、2H-吡喃環及6H-吡喃環、三嗪環等。)之化合物、具有硫脲類及巰基之化合物、受阻酚系化合物、水楊酸衍生物系化合物、醯肼基衍生物系化合物。尤其,能夠較佳地使用三唑、苯并三唑等三唑系化合物、四唑、苯并四唑等四唑系化合物。<<<Migration inhibitor>>> It is preferable that the photosensitive resin composition further contains a migration inhibitor. By including the migration inhibitor, it is possible to effectively suppress the migration of metal ions originating from the metal layer (metal wiring) into the photosensitive resin composition layer. The migration inhibitor is not particularly limited, and examples include heterocyclic rings (pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrazole ring, isoxazole ring, isothiazole ring, tetrazole ring). Ring, pyridine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, piperidine ring, piperazine ring, morpholine ring, 2H-pyran ring, 6H-pyran ring, triazine ring, etc.). Thiourea and mercapto compounds, hindered phenol compounds, salicylic acid derivative compounds, hydrazino derivative compounds. In particular, triazole-based compounds such as triazole and benzotriazole, and tetrazole-based compounds such as tetrazole and benzotetrazole can be preferably used.

又,亦能夠使用捕捉鹵素離子等陰離子之離子捕捉劑。In addition, an ion scavenger that traps anions such as halogen ions can also be used.

作為其他遷移抑制劑,能夠使用日本特開2013-15701號公報的0094段中所記載之防錆劑、日本特開2009-283711號公報的0073~0076段中所記載之化合物、日本特開2011-59656號公報的0052段中所記載之化合物、日本特開2012-194520號公報的0114、0116段及0118段中所記載之化合物等。As other migration inhibitors, the antiseptic agents described in paragraph 0094 of JP 2013-15701 A, the compounds described in paragraphs 0073 to 0076 of JP 2009-283711, and JP 2011 can be used. The compound described in paragraph 0052 of -59656, the compound described in paragraph 0114, paragraph 0116, and paragraph 0118 of JP 2012-194520, etc.

作為遷移抑制劑的具體例,能夠列舉1H-1,2,3-三唑、1H-1,2,4-三唑、1H-四唑。Specific examples of migration inhibitors include 1H-1,2,3-triazole, 1H-1,2,4-triazole, and 1H-tetrazole.

當感光性樹脂組成物具有遷移抑制劑時,遷移抑制劑的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分,是0.01~5.0質量%為較佳,0.05~2.0質量%為更佳,0.1~1.0質量%為進一步較佳。 遷移抑制劑可以僅為一種,亦可以為兩種以上。當遷移抑制劑為兩種以上時,其合計為上述範圍為較佳。When the photosensitive resin composition has a migration inhibitor, the content of the migration inhibitor relative to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 0.01 to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 2.0% by mass, and 0.1 to 1.0% by mass is more preferable. There may be only one type of migration inhibitor, or two or more types. When there are two or more migration inhibitors, it is preferable that the total of them is in the above-mentioned range.

<<<聚合抑制劑>>> 本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物包含聚合抑制劑為較佳。 作為聚合抑制劑,例如可較佳地使用對苯二酚、對甲氧基苯酚、二-第三丁基-對甲酚、鄰苯三酚、對-第三丁基鄰苯二酚、對苯醌、二苯基-對苯醌、4,4’-硫代雙(3-甲基-6-第三丁基苯酚)、2,2’-亞甲基雙(4-甲基-6-第三丁基苯酚)、N-亞硝基-N-苯基羥基胺鋁鹽、吩噻嗪、N-亞苯基二苯胺、N-苯基萘胺、伸乙基二胺四乙酸、1,2-環己二胺四乙酸、乙二醇醚二胺四乙酸、2,6-二-第三丁基-4-甲基苯酚、5-亞硝基-8-羥基喹啉、1-亞硝基-2-萘酚、2-亞硝基-1-萘酚、2-亞硝基-5-(N-乙基-N-磺基丙基胺)苯酚、N-亞硝基-N-(1-萘基)羥胺銨鹽、雙(4-羥基-3,5-第三丁基)苯基甲烷等。又,亦能夠使用日本特開2015-127817號公報的0060段中所記載之聚合抑制劑及國際公開WO2015/125469號的0031~0046段中所記載之化合物。 當組成物具有聚合抑制劑時,聚合抑制劑的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分是0.01~5質量%為較佳。 聚合抑制劑可以僅為一種,亦可以為兩種以上。當聚合抑制劑為兩種以上時,其合計為上述範圍為較佳。<<<Polymerization inhibitor>>> The photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention preferably contains a polymerization inhibitor. As the polymerization inhibitor, for example, hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tertiary butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, p-tert-butylcatechol, p- Benzoquinone, diphenyl-p-benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis(3-methyl-6-tertiary butylphenol), 2,2'-methylenebis(4-methyl-6 -Tertiary butylphenol), N-nitroso-N-phenylhydroxylamine aluminum salt, phenothiazine, N-phenylenediphenylamine, N-phenylnaphthylamine, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, 1,2-Cyclohexanediaminetetraacetic acid, glycol ether diaminetetraacetic acid, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol, 5-nitroso-8-hydroxyquinoline, 1 -Nitroso-2-naphthol, 2-nitroso-1-naphthol, 2-nitroso-5-(N-ethyl-N-sulfopropylamine)phenol, N-nitroso -N-(1-naphthyl)hydroxylamine ammonium salt, bis(4-hydroxy-3,5-tertiarybutyl)phenylmethane, etc. In addition, the polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 0060 of JP 2015-127817 A and the compound described in paragraphs 0031 to 0046 of International Publication WO2015/125469 can also be used. When the composition has a polymerization inhibitor, the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition. There may be only one type of polymerization inhibitor, or two or more types. When there are two or more kinds of polymerization inhibitors, it is preferable that the sum total is the above-mentioned range.

<<<熱鹼產生劑>>> 本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物可以包含熱鹼產生劑。 作為熱鹼產生劑,其種類等並無特別限定,包含熱鹼產生劑為較佳,該熱鹼產生劑包含選自產生加熱至40℃以上之鹼之酸性化合物及具有pKa1為0~4的陰離子和銨陽離子之銨鹽中之至少一種。其中,pKa1表示酸的第一質子的解離常數(Ka)的對數(-Log10 Ka),詳細內容將後述。 藉由對該種化合物進行配合,能夠於低溫下進行聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等的環化反應,並且能夠得到穩定性更加優異之組成物。又,關於熱鹼產生劑,只要不加熱則不產生鹼,因此即使與聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等同時存在,亦能夠抑制保存中的聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等的環化,從而保存穩定性更加優異。<<<Thermal base generator>>> The photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention may contain a thermal base generator. The type of the thermal base generator is not particularly limited, and it is preferable to include a thermal base generator. The thermal base generator includes an acidic compound selected from the group that generates a base heated to 40°C or higher and those having a pKa1 of 0-4 At least one of the ammonium salt of an anion and an ammonium cation. Here, pKa1 represents the logarithm (-Log 10 Ka) of the dissociation constant (Ka) of the first proton of the acid, and the details will be described later. By blending this compound, the cyclization reaction of the polyimide precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor can be carried out at a low temperature, and a composition with more excellent stability can be obtained. In addition, the thermal alkali generator does not generate alkali as long as it is not heated. Therefore, even if it coexists with the polyimide precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor, it can suppress the polyimide precursor and the polyimide precursor during storage. The cyclization of polybenzoxazole precursors, etc., makes it more excellent in storage stability.

熱鹼產生劑包含選自加熱至40℃以上時產生鹼之酸性化合物(A1)及具有pKa1為0~4的陰離子和銨陽離子之銨鹽(A2)之至少一種為較佳。 關於上述酸性化合物(A1)及上述銨鹽(A2),若加熱則產生鹼,因此藉由由該些化合物產生之鹼,能夠促進聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等的環化反應,並能夠與低溫下進行聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等的環化。又,關於該些化合物,即使與藉由鹼而環化並硬化之聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等同時存在,只要不加熱則幾乎不進行聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等的環化,因此能夠製備包含穩定性優異之聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等之感光性樹脂組成物。 此外,本說明書中,酸性化合物是指利用pH(power of hydrogen)計將如下溶液於20℃下進行測定而得到之值小於7之化合物,該溶液是將1g化合物提取到容器,添加50ml的離子交換水與四氫呋喃的混合液(質量比為水/四氫呋喃=1/4),於室溫下攪拌1小時而得到。The thermal base generator preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of an acidic compound (A1) that generates a base when heated to 40°C or higher, an anion having a pKa1 of 0 to 4, and an ammonium salt (A2) of an ammonium cation (A2). Regarding the acidic compound (A1) and the ammonium salt (A2), when heated, an alkali is generated. Therefore, the alkali generated by these compounds can promote the improvement of polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors, etc. Cyclization reaction, and can carry out the cyclization of polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors at low temperature. In addition, regarding these compounds, even if they coexist with polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors that are cyclized and hardened by an alkali, the polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors are hardly carried out as long as they are not heated. Cyclization of polybenzoxazole precursors, etc., makes it possible to prepare photosensitive resin compositions containing polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors with excellent stability. In addition, in this specification, an acidic compound refers to a compound whose value is less than 7 by measuring the following solution at 20°C with a pH (power of hydrogen) meter. The solution is to extract 1g of the compound into a container and add 50ml of ions. The mixed solution of exchange water and tetrahydrofuran (mass ratio of water/tetrahydrofuran=1/4) is obtained by stirring at room temperature for 1 hour.

本發明中,酸性化合物(A1)及銨鹽(A2)的鹼產生溫度是40℃以上為較佳,120~200℃為更佳。鹼產生溫度的上限是190℃以下為較佳,180℃以下為更佳,165℃以下為進一步較佳。鹼產生溫度的下限是130℃以上為較佳,135℃以上為更佳。 酸性化合物(A1)及銨鹽(A2)的鹼產生溫度只要是120℃以上,則於保存中不易產生鹼,因此能夠製備包含穩定性優異之聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等之感光性樹脂組成物。酸性化合物(A1)及銨鹽(A2)的鹼產生溫度只要是200℃以下,則能夠降低聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等的環化溫度。關於鹼產生溫度,例如,能夠利用差示掃描量熱測定,將化合物於耐壓膠囊中以5℃/分鐘加熱至250℃,讀取溫度最低的發熱峰值的峰值溫度,並將峰值溫度作為鹼產生溫度來進行測定。In the present invention, the base generation temperature of the acidic compound (A1) and the ammonium salt (A2) is preferably 40°C or higher, and more preferably 120 to 200°C. The upper limit of the alkali generation temperature is preferably 190°C or lower, more preferably 180°C or lower, and even more preferably 165°C or lower. The lower limit of the alkali generation temperature is preferably 130°C or higher, and more preferably 135°C or higher. As long as the alkali generation temperature of the acidic compound (A1) and the ammonium salt (A2) is 120°C or higher, the alkali is unlikely to be generated during storage. Therefore, it is possible to prepare polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors with excellent stability Photosensitive resin composition such as objects. As long as the alkali generation temperature of the acidic compound (A1) and the ammonium salt (A2) is 200° C. or lower, the cyclization temperature of the polyimide precursor, the polybenzoxazole precursor, and the like can be lowered. Regarding the alkali generation temperature, for example, differential scanning calorimetry can be used to heat the compound in a pressure-resistant capsule at 5°C/min to 250°C, read the peak temperature of the heating peak with the lowest temperature, and use the peak temperature as the alkali Generate temperature for measurement.

本發明中,藉由熱鹼產生劑產生之鹼是2級胺或3級胺為較佳,3級胺為更佳。3級胺的鹼性較高,因此能夠進一步降低聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等的環化溫度。又,藉由熱鹼產生劑產生之鹼的沸點是80℃以上為較佳,100℃以上為更佳,140℃以上為最佳。 又,所產生之鹼之分子量是80~2000為較佳。下限是100以上為更佳。上限是500以下為更佳。此外,分子量的值是由結構式求出之理論值。In the present invention, the base produced by the thermal base generator is preferably a secondary amine or a tertiary amine, and more preferably a tertiary amine. The tertiary amine has high basicity, so it can further reduce the cyclization temperature of polyimine precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors. In addition, the boiling point of the alkali produced by the thermal alkali generator is preferably 80°C or higher, more preferably 100°C or higher, and most preferably 140°C or higher. In addition, the molecular weight of the base produced is preferably 80 to 2,000. It is more preferable that the lower limit is 100 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 500 or less. In addition, the value of the molecular weight is a theoretical value obtained from the structural formula.

本發明中,上述酸性化合物(A1)包含選自銨鹽及後述之由式(101)或(102)表示之化合物中之一種以上為較佳。In the present invention, it is preferable that the acidic compound (A1) contains one or more selected from the group consisting of ammonium salts and compounds represented by formula (101) or (102) described later.

本發明中,上述銨鹽(A2)是酸性化合物為較佳。此外,上述銨鹽(A2)可以是包含加熱至40℃以上(較佳為120~200℃)時產生鹼之酸性化合物之化合物,亦可以是除了加熱至40℃以上(較佳為120~200℃)時產生鹼之酸性化合物以外的化合物。In the present invention, the above-mentioned ammonium salt (A2) is preferably an acidic compound. In addition, the above-mentioned ammonium salt (A2) may be a compound containing an acidic compound that generates a base when heated to 40°C or higher (preferably 120 to 200°C), or may be a compound other than heating to 40°C or higher (preferably 120 to 200°C). ℃) when it produces compounds other than the acidic compounds of the base.

本發明中,銨鹽是指由下述式(101)或式(102)表示之銨陽離子與陰離子的鹽。陰離子可以藉由共價鍵與銨陽離子的任意一部分鍵結,亦可以於銨陽離子的分子外具有,但於銨陽離子的分子外具有為較佳。此外,陰離子於銨陽離子的分子外具有是指銨陽離子與陰離子並不藉由共價鍵而鍵結之情況。以下,還將陽離子部的分子外的陰離子稱為陰離子。 式(101)式(102) [化學式40]

Figure 02_image079
式(101)及式(102)中,R1 ~R6 分別獨立地表示氫原子或烴基,R7 表示烴基。式(101)及式(102)中的R1 與R2 、R3 與R4 、R5 與R6 、R5 與R7 可以分別鍵結而形成環。In the present invention, the ammonium salt means a salt of an ammonium cation and an anion represented by the following formula (101) or (102). The anion may be bonded to any part of the ammonium cation via a covalent bond, or it may be present outside the molecule of the ammonium cation, but it is preferred to have it outside the molecule of the ammonium cation. In addition, the presence of the anion outside the molecule of the ammonium cation means that the ammonium cation and the anion are not bonded by a covalent bond. Hereinafter, the anion outside the molecule of the cation part is also referred to as an anion. Formula (101) Formula (102) [Chemical formula 40]
Figure 02_image079
In formula (101) and formula (102), R 1 to R 6 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, and R 7 represents a hydrocarbon group. R 1 and R 2 , R 3 and R 4 , R 5 and R 6 , and R 5 and R 7 in formula (101) and formula (102) may be respectively bonded to form a ring.

銨陽離子由下述式(Y1-1)~(Y1-5)中的任一個表示為較佳。 [化學式41]

Figure 02_image081
The ammonium cation is preferably represented by any of the following formulas (Y1-1) to (Y1-5). [Chemical formula 41]
Figure 02_image081

式(Y1-1)~(Y1-5)中,R101 表示n價有機基團,R1 及R7 與式(101)或式(102)的定義相同。 式(Y1-1)~(Y1-5)中,Ar101 及Ar102 分別獨立地表示芳基,n表示1以上的整數,m表示0~5的整數。In formulas (Y1-1) to (Y1-5), R 101 represents an n-valent organic group, and R 1 and R 7 have the same definitions as in formula (101) or formula (102). In formulas (Y1-1) to (Y1-5), Ar 101 and Ar 102 each independently represent an aryl group, n represents an integer of 1 or more, and m represents an integer of 0-5.

本發明中,銨鹽具有pKa1為0~4的陰離子和銨陽離子為較佳。陰離子的pKa1的上限是3.5以下為更佳,3.2以下為進一步較佳。下限是0.5以上為較佳,1.0以上為更佳。陰離子的pKa1只要是上述範圍,則能夠於低溫下將聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等環化,進而,能夠提高包含聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等之感光性樹脂組成物的穩定性。pKa1只要是4以下,則熱鹼產生劑的穩定性良好,且於不進行加熱之情況下抑制產生鹼,且包含聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等之感光性樹脂組成物的穩定性為良好。pKa1只要是0以上,則所產生之鹼不易被中和,聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等的環化效率為良好。 陰離子的種類是選自羧酸陰離子、苯酚陰離子、磷酸陰離子及硫酸陰離子中之一種為較佳,從可兼顧鹽的穩定性和熱分解性的原因考慮,羧酸陰離子為更佳。亦即,銨鹽是銨陽離子與羧酸陰離子的鹽為更佳。 羧酸陰離子是具有2個以上的羧基之2價以上的羧酸的陰離子為較佳,2價羧酸的陰離子為更佳。依該態樣,能夠設為能夠進一步提高包含聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等之感光性樹脂組成物的穩定性、硬化性及顯影性之熱鹼產生劑。尤其,藉由使用2價羧酸的陰離子,能夠進一步提高包含聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等之感光性樹脂組成物的穩定性、硬化性及顯影性。 本發明中,羧酸陰離子是pKa1為4以下的羧酸的陰離子為較佳。pKa1是3.5以下為更佳,3.2以下為進一步較佳。依該態樣,能夠進一步提高包含聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物等之感光性樹脂組成物的穩定性。 於此,pKa1表示酸的第一質子的解離常數的倒數的對數,並能夠參閱Determination of Organic Structures by Physical Methods(作者:Brown, H. C., McDaniel, D. H., Hafliger, O., Nachod, F. C.;編纂:Braude, E. A., Nachod, F. C.; Academic Press, New York, 1955)、Data for Biochemical Research(作者:Dawson, R.M.C.et al; Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1959)中所記載之值。關於未記載於該些文獻中之化合物,使用利用ACD/pKa(ACD/Labs製)的軟體並藉由結構式計算出之值。In the present invention, it is preferable that the ammonium salt has an anion having a pKa1 of 0 to 4 and an ammonium cation. The upper limit of the pKa1 of the anion is more preferably 3.5 or less, and more preferably 3.2 or less. The lower limit is preferably 0.5 or more, and more preferably 1.0 or more. As long as the pKa1 of the anion is in the above range, polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors can be cyclized at low temperatures, and furthermore, the inclusion of polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors can be improved. Stability of photosensitive resin compositions such as materials. As long as pKa1 is 4 or less, the stability of the thermal alkali generator is good, and the generation of alkali is suppressed without heating, and the photosensitive resin composition containing polyimide precursors and polybenzoxazole precursors, etc. The stability of the material is good. As long as pKa1 is 0 or more, the generated alkali is not easily neutralized, and the cyclization efficiency of the polyimide precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor is good. The type of anion is preferably one selected from the group consisting of carboxylic acid anion, phenol anion, phosphoric acid anion, and sulfuric acid anion, and carboxylic acid anion is more preferable from the viewpoint of compatibility of salt stability and thermal decomposition. That is, the ammonium salt is more preferably a salt of an ammonium cation and a carboxylic anion. The carboxylic acid anion is preferably an anion of a divalent or more carboxylic acid having two or more carboxyl groups, and more preferably an anion of a divalent carboxylic acid. According to this aspect, it can be used as a thermal alkali generator that can further improve the stability, curability, and developability of a photosensitive resin composition including a polyimide precursor, a polybenzoxazole precursor, and the like. In particular, by using an anion of a divalent carboxylic acid, it is possible to further improve the stability, curability, and developability of a photosensitive resin composition including a polyimide precursor, a polybenzoxazole precursor, and the like. In the present invention, the carboxylic acid anion is preferably an anion of a carboxylic acid having a pKa1 of 4 or less. It is more preferable that pKa1 is 3.5 or less, and it is still more preferable that it is 3.2 or less. According to this aspect, the stability of the photosensitive resin composition including the polyimide precursor, the polybenzoxazole precursor, and the like can be further improved. Here, pKa1 represents the logarithm of the reciprocal of the dissociation constant of the first proton of the acid, and can be found in Determination of Organic Structures by Physical Methods (Author: Brown, HC, McDaniel, DH, Hafliger, O., Nachod, FC; compilation: Braude, EA, Nachod, FC; Academic Press, New York, 1955), Data for Biochemical Research (Author: Dawson, RMC et al; Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1959). For compounds not described in these documents, the value calculated from the structural formula using software using ACD/pKa (manufactured by ACD/Labs) was used.

羧酸陰離子由下述式(X1)表示為較佳。 [化學式42]

Figure 02_image083
式(X1)中,EWG表示吸電子基。The carboxylic acid anion is preferably represented by the following formula (X1). [Chemical formula 42]
Figure 02_image083
In formula (X1), EWG represents an electron withdrawing group.

本發明中,吸電子基是指哈米特取代基常數σm表示正的值者。其中,σm於都野雄總說、Journal of Synthetic Organic Chemistry, Japan第23巻第8號(1965)p.631-642中進行詳細說明。此外,本發明中的吸電子基並不限定於上述文獻中所記載之取代基。 作為σm表示正的值之取代基的例,例如可列舉CF3 基(σm=0.43)、CF3 CO基(σm=0.63)、HC≡C基(σm=0.21)、CH2 =CH基(σm=0.06)、Ac基(σm=0.38)、MeOCO基(σm=0.37)、MeCOCH=CH基(σm=0.21)、PhCO基(σm=0.34)、H2 NCOCH2 基(σm=0.06)等。此外,Me表示甲基,Ac表示乙醯基,Ph表示苯基。In the present invention, the electron withdrawing group refers to a Hammett substituent constant σm showing a positive value. Among them, σm is described in detail in Tono Ooto, Journal of Synthetic Organic Chemistry, Japan Volume 23, No. 8 (1965) p.631-642. In addition, the electron withdrawing group in the present invention is not limited to the substituents described in the above-mentioned documents. Examples of substituents whose σm represents a positive value include CF 3 groups (σm=0.43), CF 3 CO groups (σm=0.63), HC≡C groups (σm=0.21), CH 2 =CH groups ( σm=0.06), Ac group (σm=0.38), MeOCO group (σm=0.37), MeCOCH=CH group (σm=0.21), PhCO group (σm=0.34), H 2 NCOCH 2 group (σm=0.06), etc. . In addition, Me represents a methyl group, Ac represents an acetyl group, and Ph represents a phenyl group.

EWG是由下述式(EWG-1)~(EWG-6)表示之基團為較佳。 [化學式43]

Figure 02_image085
式(EWG-1)~(EWG-6)中,Rx1 ~Rx3 分別獨立地表示氫原子、烷基、烯基、芳基、羥基或羧基,Ar表示芳香族基。EWG is preferably a group represented by the following formulas (EWG-1) to (EWG-6). [Chemical formula 43]
Figure 02_image085
In the formulas (EWG-1) to (EWG-6), R x1 to R x3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a hydroxyl group, or a carboxyl group, and Ar represents an aromatic group.

本發明中,羧酸陰離子由下述式(XA)表示為較佳。 式(XA) [化學式44]

Figure 02_image087
式(XA)中,L10 表示選自單鍵或伸烷基、伸烯基、芳香族基團、-NRX -及它們的組合中之2價連接基,RX 表示氫原子、烷基、烯基或芳基。In the present invention, the carboxylic acid anion is preferably represented by the following formula (XA). Formula (XA) [Chemical formula 44]
Figure 02_image087
In the formula (XA), L 10 represents a divalent linking group selected from a single bond or an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, an aromatic group, -NR X -and a combination thereof, and R X represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group , Alkenyl or aryl.

作為羧酸陰離子的具體例,可列舉馬來酸陰離子、鄰苯二甲酸陰離子、N-苯基亞胺基二乙酸陰離子及草酸陰離子。能夠較佳地使用該些。Specific examples of the carboxylic acid anion include maleic acid anion, phthalic acid anion, N-phenyliminodiacetic acid anion, and oxalic acid anion. These can be used preferably.

作為熱鹼產生劑的具體例,能夠列舉以下化合物。 [化學式45]

Figure 02_image089
[化學式46]
Figure 02_image091
As specific examples of the thermal base generator, the following compounds can be cited. [Chemical formula 45]
Figure 02_image089
[Chemical formula 46]
Figure 02_image091

[化學式47]

Figure 02_image093
[Chemical formula 47]
Figure 02_image093

當使用熱鹼產生劑時,感光性樹脂組成物中的熱鹼產生劑的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分,是0.1~50質量%為較佳。下限是0.5質量%以上為更佳,1質量%以上為進一步較佳。上限是30質量%以下為更佳,20質量%以下為進一步較佳。 熱鹼產生劑能夠使用一種或兩種以上。當使用兩種以上時,合計量是上述範圍為較佳。When a thermal base generator is used, the content of the thermal base generator in the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition. The lower limit is more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 1% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 30% by mass or less, and more preferably 20% by mass or less. One kind or two or more kinds of thermal base generators can be used. When two or more are used, the total amount is preferably in the above-mentioned range.

<<<金屬黏附性改良劑>>> 本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物包含用於提高與使用於電極或配線等之金屬材料的黏附性之金屬黏附性改良劑為較佳。作為金屬黏附性改良劑的例,可列舉日本特開2014-186186號公報的0046~0049段、日本特開2013-072935號公報的0032~0043段中所記載之硫化物。作為金屬黏附性改良劑,還例示下述化合物(N-[3-(三乙氧基矽基)丙基]馬來酸單醯胺等)。 [化學式48]

Figure 02_image095
金屬黏附性改良劑相對於樹脂100質量份較佳為0.1~30質量份,更佳為0.5~15質量份的範圍。藉由設為0.1質量份以上,硬化製程後的硬化膜與金屬層的黏附性變良好,藉由設為30質量份以下,硬化製程後的硬化膜的耐熱性、機械特性變良好。 金屬黏附性改良劑可以僅為一種,亦可以可兩種以上。當使用兩種以上時,其合計為上述範圍為較佳。<<<Metal adhesion improver>>> The photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention preferably contains a metal adhesion improver for improving the adhesion to metal materials used in electrodes, wiring, and the like. Examples of the metal adhesion improver include the sulfides described in paragraphs 0046 to 0049 of JP 2014-186186 and paragraphs 0032 to 0043 of JP 2013-072935. As the metal adhesion improver, the following compounds (N-[3-(triethoxysilyl)propyl]maleic acid monoamide etc.) are also exemplified. [Chemical formula 48]
Figure 02_image095
The metal adhesion modifier is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 30 parts by mass, and more preferably in the range of 0.5 to 15 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin. By setting it as 0.1 parts by mass or more, the adhesion between the cured film and the metal layer after the curing process becomes good, and by setting it as 30 parts by mass or less, the heat resistance and mechanical properties of the cured film after the curing process become better. There may be only one type of metal adhesion modifier, or two or more types. When two or more are used, it is preferable that the sum total is the above-mentioned range.

<<<溶劑>>> 當將本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物藉由塗佈而形成為層狀時,對溶劑進行配合為較佳。關於溶劑,只要能夠將感光性樹脂組成物形成為層狀,則能夠無限制地使用公知者。作為溶劑,可列舉酯類、醚類、酮類、芳香族烴類、亞碸類等化合物。 作為酯類,例如可較佳地列舉乙酸乙酯、乙酸正丁酯、乙酸異丁酯、甲酸戊酯、乙酸異戊酯、丙酸丁酯、丁酸異丙酯、丁酸乙酯、丁酸丁酯、乳酸甲酯、乳酸乙酯、γ-丁內酯、ε-己內酯、δ-戊內酯、烷氧基乙酸烷基酯(例:烷氧基乙酸甲酯、烷氧基乙酸乙酯、烷氧基乙酸丁酯(例如,甲氧基乙酸甲酯、甲氧基乙酸乙酯、甲氧基丁酯、乙氧基乙酸甲酯、乙氧基乙酸乙酯等))、3-烷氧基丙酸烷基酯類(例:3-烷氧基丙酸甲酯、3-烷氧基丙酸乙酯等(例如,3-甲氧基丙酸甲酯、3-甲氧基丙酸乙酯、3-乙氧基丙酸甲酯、3-乙氧基丙酸乙酯等))、2-烷氧基丙酸烷基酯類(例:2-烷氧基丙酸甲酯、2-烷氧基丙酸乙酯、2-烷氧基丙酸丙酯等(例如,2-甲氧基丙酸甲酯、2-甲氧基丙酸乙酯、2-甲氧基丙酸丙酯、2-乙氧基丙酸甲酯、2-乙氧基丙酸乙酯))、2-烷氧基-2-甲基丙酸甲酯及2-烷氧基-2-甲基丙酸乙酯(例如,2-甲氧基-2-甲基丙酸甲酯、2-乙氧基-2-甲基丙酸乙酯等)、丙酮酸甲酯、丙酮酸乙酯、丙酮酸丙酯、乙醯乙酸甲酯、乙醯乙酸乙酯、2-氧代丁酸甲酯、2-氧代丁酸乙酯等。 作為醚類,例如可較佳地列舉二甘醇二甲基醚、四氫呋喃、乙二醇一甲基醚、乙二醇單乙基醚、甲基賽路蘇乙酸酯、乙基賽路蘇乙酸酯、二甘醇一甲基醚、二甘醇一乙基醚、二甘醇一丁基醚、丙二醇單甲基醚、丙二醇單甲基醚乙酸酯、丙二醇單乙基醚乙酸酯、丙二醇單丙基醚乙酸酯等。 作為酮類,例如可較佳地列舉甲基乙基酮、環己酮、環戊酮,2-庚酮、3-庚酮、N-甲基-2-吡咯烷酮等。 作為芳香族烴類,例如可較佳地列舉甲苯、二甲苯、苯甲醚、檸檬烯等。 作為亞碸類,可較佳地列舉二甲基亞碸。<<<Solvent>>> When the photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention is formed into a layer by coating, it is preferable to blend a solvent. Regarding the solvent, as long as the photosensitive resin composition can be formed into a layered form, known ones can be used without limitation. Examples of the solvent include compounds such as esters, ethers, ketones, aromatic hydrocarbons, and sulfites. As esters, for example, ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, pentyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl Butyl acid, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, γ-butyrolactone, ε-caprolactone, δ-valerolactone, alkyl alkoxy acetate (example: alkoxy methyl acetate, alkoxy Ethyl acetate, butyl alkoxyacetate (for example, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, methoxybutyl, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate, etc.), 3-Alkoxypropionic acid alkyl esters (e.g. 3-alkoxy methyl propionate, 3-alkoxy ethyl propionate, etc. (e.g., 3-methoxy propionate methyl, 3-methyl Ethyl oxypropionate, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, etc.), 2-alkoxypropionic acid alkyl esters (example: 2-alkoxypropionate Methyl ester, ethyl 2-alkoxypropionate, propyl 2-alkoxypropionate, etc. (for example, methyl 2-methoxypropionate, ethyl 2-methoxypropionate, 2-methyl Propyl oxypropionate, methyl 2-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxypropionate)), methyl 2-alkoxy-2-methylpropionate and 2-alkoxy- Ethyl 2-methylpropionate (for example, methyl 2-methoxy-2-methylpropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxy-2-methylpropionate, etc.), methyl pyruvate, pyruvate Ethyl ester, propyl pyruvate, methyl acetylacetate, ethyl acetylacetate, methyl 2-oxobutyrate, ethyl 2-oxobutyrate, etc. As the ethers, for example, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl siloxol acetate, ethyl siloxol Acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetic acid Ester, propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate, etc. As the ketones, for example, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, etc. are preferably mentioned. As aromatic hydrocarbons, for example, toluene, xylene, anisole, limonene, etc. are preferably mentioned. As the sulfenites, dimethyl sulfenite can preferably be cited.

關於溶劑,從塗佈面狀的改良等的觀點考慮,混合兩種以上之形態亦為較佳。其中,由選自3-乙氧基丙酸甲酯、3-乙氧基丙酸乙酯、乙基賽路蘇乙酸酯、乳酸乙酯、二甘醇二甲基醚、乙酸丁酯、3-甲氧基丙酸甲酯、2-庚酮、環己酮、環戊酮、γ-丁內酯、二甲基亞碸、乙基卡必醇乙酸酯、丁基卡必醇乙酸酯、丙二醇甲基醚及丙二醇甲基醚乙酸酯中之兩種以上構成之混合溶液為較佳。同時使用二甲基亞碸和γ-丁內酯為特佳。Regarding the solvent, from the viewpoint of improvement of the coating surface shape, etc., a form in which two or more types are mixed is also preferable. Among them, it is selected from the group consisting of 3-ethoxy methyl propionate, 3-ethoxy ethyl propionate, ethyl cyrus acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, Methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, γ-butyrolactone, dimethyl sulfoxide, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol ethyl A mixed solution composed of two or more of acid esters, propylene glycol methyl ether, and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate is preferable. It is particularly preferred to use dimethyl sulfoxide and γ-butyrolactone at the same time.

當感光性樹脂組成物具有溶劑時,關於溶劑的含量,從塗佈性的觀點考慮,將感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分濃度設為成為5~80質量%之量為較佳,5~70質量%為進一步較佳,10~60質量%為特佳。溶劑的含量依所希望的厚度並藉由塗佈方法來進行調節即可。例如,塗佈方法只要是旋塗法或狹縫塗佈法,則成為上述範圍的固體成分濃度之溶劑的含量為較佳。只要是噴塗法,則設為成為0.1質量%~50質量%之量為較佳,設為1.0質量%~25質量%為較佳。依塗佈方法調節溶劑的含量,藉此能夠均勻形成所希望的厚度的感光性樹脂組成物層。 溶劑可以僅為一種,亦可以是兩種以上。當溶劑是兩種以上時,其合計為上述範圍為較佳。 又,從膜強度的觀點考慮,N-甲基-2-吡咯烷酮、N-乙基-2-吡咯烷酮、N,N-二甲基乙醯胺及N,N-二甲基甲醯胺的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總質量小於5質量%為較佳,小於1質量%為更佳,小於0.5質量%為特佳,小於0.1質量%為進一步特佳。When the photosensitive resin composition has a solvent, regarding the content of the solvent, from the viewpoint of coatability, the total solid content concentration of the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 5 to 80% by mass, 5 to 70% by mass is more preferable, and 10 to 60% by mass is particularly preferable. The content of the solvent can be adjusted by the coating method according to the desired thickness. For example, as long as the coating method is a spin coating method or a slit coating method, the content of the solvent having the solid content concentration in the above-mentioned range is preferable. As long as it is a spraying method, it is preferable to set it as 0.1 mass%-50 mass %, and it is preferable to set it as 1.0 mass%-25 mass %. By adjusting the content of the solvent according to the coating method, a photosensitive resin composition layer of a desired thickness can be uniformly formed. The solvent may be only one type or two or more types. When there are two or more solvents, it is preferable that the total amount is the above-mentioned range. Also, from the viewpoint of film strength, the content of N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-ethyl-2-pyrrolidone, N,N-dimethylacetamide, and N,N-dimethylformamide It is preferably less than 5% by mass relative to the total mass of the photosensitive resin composition, more preferably less than 1% by mass, particularly preferably less than 0.5% by mass, and more preferably less than 0.1% by mass.

<<<其他添加劑>>> 本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物在不損害本發明的效果之範圍內,能夠依需要對各種添加物,例如,光鹼產生劑、熱聚合起始劑、熱酸產生劑、矽烷偶聯劑、增感色素、鏈轉移劑、界面活性劑、高級脂肪酸衍生物、無機粒子、硬化劑、硬化催化劑、填充劑、抗氧化劑、紫外線吸收劑、凝聚抑制劑等進行配合。對該些添加劑進行配合時,將其合計配合量設為組成物的固體成分的3質量%以下為較佳。<<<Other additives>>> The photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention can add various additives, such as photobase generators and thermal polymerization initiators, as needed within the range that does not impair the effects of the present invention. , Thermal acid generators, silane coupling agents, sensitizing dyes, chain transfer agents, surfactants, higher fatty acid derivatives, inorganic particles, hardeners, hardening catalysts, fillers, antioxidants, ultraviolet absorbers, aggregation inhibitors Wait for cooperation. When these additives are blended, the total blending amount is preferably 3% by mass or less of the solid content of the composition.

(光鹼產生劑) 本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物可以包含光鹼產生劑。光鹼產生劑為藉由曝光產生鹼者,於常溫常壓的條件下不顯示活性,但作為外部刺激而進行電磁波的照射和加熱,則只要是產生鹼(鹼性物質)者就並無特別限定。藉由曝光而產生之鹼作為藉由加熱使聚醯亞胺前驅物及苯并噁唑前驅物等硬化時的催化劑而發揮功能,因此能夠較佳地使用於負型。(Photobase generator) The photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention may contain a photobase generator. Photobase generators are those that generate alkalis by exposure, and do not show activity under normal temperature and pressure conditions. However, as long as they are irradiated and heated by electromagnetic waves as an external stimulus, there is nothing special as long as they generate alkalis (alkaline substances). limited. The alkali generated by exposure functions as a catalyst when the polyimide precursor and the benzoxazole precursor are hardened by heating, and therefore can be preferably used in the negative type.

作為光鹼產生劑的含量,只要能夠形成所希望的圖案就並無特別限定,能夠設為通常的含量。光鹼產生劑相對於樹脂100質量份是0.01質量份以上且小於30質量份的範圍內為較佳,是0.05質量份~25質量份的範圍內為更佳,是0.1質量份~20質量份的範圍內為進一步較佳。 光鹼產生劑可以僅為一種,亦可以是兩種以上。當光鹼產生劑為兩種以上時,其合計範圍是上述範圍為較佳。The content of the photobase generator is not particularly limited as long as a desired pattern can be formed, and it can be set to a normal content. The photobase generator is preferably in the range of 0.01 parts by mass or more and less than 30 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the resin, more preferably in the range of 0.05 parts by mass to 25 parts by mass, and more preferably in the range of 0.1 parts by mass to 20 parts by mass Within the range of is further preferred. There may be only one type of photobase generator, or two or more types. When there are two or more photobase generators, the total range is preferably the above range.

本發明中,能夠使用作為光鹼產生劑而公知者。例如,如M.Shirai, and M.Tsunooka, Prog.Polym.Sci.,21,1(1996);角岡正弘,高分子加工,46,2(1997);C.Kutal,Coord.Chem.Rev.,211,353(2001);Y.Kaneko,A.Sarker, and D.Neckers,Chem.Mater.,11,170(1999);H.Tachi,M.Shirai, and M.Tsunooka,J.Photopolym.Sci.Technol.,13,153(2000);M.Winkle, and K.Graziano,J.Photopolym.Sci.Technol.,3,419(1990);M.Tsunooka,H.Tachi, and S.Yoshitaka,J.Photopolym.Sci.Technol.,9,13(1996);K.Suyama,H.Araki,M.Shirai,J.Photopolym.Sci.Technol.,19,81(2006)中所記載,能夠列舉遷移金屬化合物錯合物、具有銨鹽等的結構者、如脒基部分藉由形成羧酸和鹽而被潛在化者那樣,鹼成分藉由形成鹽而被中和之離子性化合物、胺甲酸酯衍生物、肟酯衍生物、醯基化合物等胺基甲酸酯鍵或肟鍵等而鹼成分被潛在化之非離子性化合物。 能夠使用於本發明之光鹼產生劑無特別限定而能夠使用公知者,例如,可列舉胺甲酸酯衍生物、醯胺衍生物、醯亞胺衍生物、α鈷錯合物類、咪唑衍生物、肉桂酸醯胺衍生物、肟衍生物等。 作為光鹼產生劑,例如,可列舉如於日本特開2009-80452號公報及國際公開WO2009/123122號中公開那樣具有肉桂酸醯胺結構之光鹼產生劑、如於日本特開2006-189591號公報及日本特開2008-247747號公報中公開那樣具有胺甲酸酯結構之光鹼產生劑、如於日本特開2007-249013號公報及日本特開2008-003581號公報中公開那樣具有肟結構、胺甲醯肟結構之光鹼產生劑等,但並不限定於此,還能夠使用除此以外的公知的光鹼產生劑。 此外,作為光鹼產生劑,作為例可列舉日本特開2012-93746號公報的0185~0188段、0199~0200段及0202段中所記載之化合物、日本特開2013-194205號公報的0022~0069段中所記載之化合物、日本特開2013-204019號公報的0026~0074段中所記載之化合物及國際公開WO2010/064631號的0052段中所記載之化合物。In the present invention, those known as photobase generators can be used. For example, such as M. Shirai, and M. Tsunooka, Prog. Polym. Sci., 21, 1 (1996); Kadooka Masahiro, Polymer Processing, 46, 2 (1997); C. Kutal, Coord. Chem. Rev. .,211,353(2001); Y.Kaneko,A.Sarker, and D.Neckers,Chem.Mater.,11,170(1999); H.Tachi,M.Shirai, and M.Tsunooka,J.Photopolym.Sci.Technol .,13,153(2000); M.Winkle, and K.Graziano,J.Photopolym.Sci.Technol.,3,419(1990); M.Tsunooka,H.Tachi, and S.Yoshitaka,J.Photopolym.Sci.Technol ., 9, 13 (1996); K. Suyama, H. Araki, M. Shirai, J. Photopolym. Sci. Technol., 19, 81 (2006). Structures such as ammonium salts, such as those where the amidino moiety is latentized by the formation of carboxylic acids and salts, ionic compounds, urethane derivatives, and oxime esters in which alkali components are neutralized by the formation of salts Nonionic compounds such as urethane bonds or oxime bonds, such as compounds, acyl compounds, etc., in which the alkali component is latentized. The photobase generators that can be used in the present invention are not particularly limited, and known ones can be used. For example, carbamate derivatives, amide derivatives, imine derivatives, α-cobalt complexes, and imidazole derivatives can be used. Compounds, cinnamic acid amide derivatives, oxime derivatives, etc. Examples of photobase generators include photobase generators having a cinnamic acid amide structure as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2009-80452 and International Publication No. WO2009/123122, such as those disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2006-189591 A photobase generator having a urethane structure as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-247747 and Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-247747 has an oxime as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2007-249013 and Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-003581 Although the photobase generator of a structure, a carbamate structure, etc., it is not limited to this, A well-known photobase generator other than this can also be used. In addition, examples of photobase generators include compounds described in paragraphs 0185 to 0188, paragraphs 0199 to 0200, and paragraph 0202 of JP 2012-93746, and 0022 to paragraphs 0202 of JP 2013-194205. The compound described in paragraph 0069, the compound described in paragraphs 0026 to 0074 of JP 2013-204019 A, and the compound described in paragraph 0052 of International Publication WO2010/064631.

(熱聚合起始劑) 本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物可以包含熱聚合起始劑(較佳為熱自由基聚合起始劑)。作為熱自由基聚合起始劑,能夠使用公知的熱自由基聚合起始劑。 熱自由基聚合起始劑是藉由熱的能量而產生自由基,並開始或促進聚合性化合物的聚合反應之化合物。藉由添加熱自由基聚合起始劑,於進行聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物的環化反應時,能夠進行聚合性化合物的聚合反應。又,當聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物包含乙烯性不飽和鍵時,能夠同時進行聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物的環化和聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物的聚合反應,因此能夠實現更高度的耐熱化。 作為熱自由基聚合起始劑,具體而言,可列舉日本特開2008-63554號公報的0074~0118段中所記載之化合物。(Thermal polymerization initiator) The photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention may contain a thermal polymerization initiator (preferably a thermal radical polymerization initiator). As the thermal radical polymerization initiator, a known thermal radical polymerization initiator can be used. The thermal radical polymerization initiator is a compound that generates free radicals by thermal energy and initiates or promotes the polymerization reaction of the polymerizable compound. By adding a thermal radical polymerization initiator, the polymerization reaction of the polymerizable compound can be carried out during the cyclization reaction of the polyimide precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor. In addition, when the polyimide precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor contain ethylenically unsaturated bonds, the cyclization and polyimide of the polyimide precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor can be performed simultaneously The polymerization reaction of the precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor can achieve a higher degree of heat resistance. Specific examples of the thermal radical polymerization initiator include the compounds described in paragraphs 0074 to 0118 of JP 2008-63554 A.

當感光性樹脂組成物具有熱自由基聚合起始劑時,熱自由基聚合起始劑的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分是0.1~50質量%為較佳,0.1~30質量%為更佳,0.1~20質量%為特佳。又,相對於聚合性化合物100質量份,包含0.1~50質量份的熱自由基聚合起始劑為較佳,包含0.5~30質量份為更佳。依該態樣,可輕鬆地形成耐熱性更加優異之硬化膜。 熱自由基聚合起始劑可以僅為一種,亦可以是兩種以上。當熱自由基聚合起始劑為兩種以上時,其合計範圍是上述範圍為較佳。When the photosensitive resin composition has a thermal radical polymerization initiator, the content of the thermal radical polymerization initiator relative to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 0.1-50% by mass, 0.1-30% by mass % Is more preferable, and 0.1-20% by mass is particularly preferable. Moreover, it is preferable to contain 0.1-50 mass parts of thermal radical polymerization initiators with respect to 100 mass parts of polymerizable compounds, and it is more preferable to contain 0.5-30 mass parts. According to this aspect, a cured film with more excellent heat resistance can be easily formed. The thermal radical polymerization initiator may be only one type or two or more types. When there are two or more thermal radical polymerization initiators, it is preferable that the total range thereof is the above-mentioned range.

(熱酸產生劑) 本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物可以包含熱酸產生劑。熱酸產生劑藉由加熱而產生酸,促進聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物的環化而提高硬化膜的機械特性。進而熱酸產生劑具有促進選自具有羥甲基、烷氧甲基或醯氧甲基之化合物、環氧化合物、氧雜環丁烷化合物及苯并噁嗪化合物中之至少一種化合物的交聯反應之效果。(Thermal acid generator) The photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention may contain a thermal acid generator. The thermal acid generator generates acid by heating, promotes the cyclization of the polyimide precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor, and improves the mechanical properties of the cured film. Furthermore, the thermal acid generator has the function of promoting crosslinking of at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a compound having a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group or an oxymethyl group, an epoxy compound, an oxetane compound, and a benzoxazine compound The effect of the reaction.

作為熱酸產生劑的例,可列舉日本特開2013-072935號公報的0055段中所記載者。As an example of a thermal acid generator, the one described in paragraph 0055 of JP 2013-072935 A can be cited.

又,作為熱酸產生劑,日本特開2013-167742號公報的0059段中所記載之化合物亦為較佳。In addition, as the thermal acid generator, the compound described in paragraph 0059 of JP 2013-167742 A is also preferable.

熱酸產生劑的含量相對於聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物100質量份是0.01質量份以上為較佳,0.1質量份以上為更佳。由於含有0.01質量份以上而促進交聯反應及聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物的環化,因此能夠進一步提高硬化膜的機械特性及耐藥品性。又,從硬化膜的電氣絕緣性的觀點考慮,是20質量份以下為較佳,15質量份以下為更佳,10質量份以下為特佳。 熱酸產生劑可以僅使用一種,亦可以使用兩種以上。當使用兩種以上時,合計量成為上述範圍為較佳。The content of the thermal acid generator is preferably 0.01 parts by mass or more with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polyimide precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor, and more preferably 0.1 parts by mass or more. Since the content is 0.01 parts by mass or more, the crosslinking reaction and the cyclization of the polyimide precursor and the polybenzoxazole precursor are promoted, so that the mechanical properties and chemical resistance of the cured film can be further improved. Moreover, from the viewpoint of the electrical insulation of the cured film, 20 parts by mass or less is preferable, 15 parts by mass or less is more preferable, and 10 parts by mass or less is particularly preferable. Only one type of thermal acid generator may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, the total amount is preferably in the above-mentioned range.

(矽烷偶聯劑) 本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物中,為了提高與基板的黏附性而可以包含矽烷偶聯劑。 作為矽烷偶聯劑的例,可列舉日本特開2014-191002號公報的0062~0073段中所記載之化合物、國際公開WO2011/080992A1號的0063~0071段中所記載之化合物、日本特開2014-191252號公報的0060~0061段中所記載之化合物、日本特開2014-41264號公報的0045~0052段中所記載之化合物、國際公開WO2014/097594號的0055段中所記載之化合物。又,如日本特開2011-128358號公報的0050~0058段中所記載那樣使用不同的兩種以上的矽烷偶聯劑亦為較佳。 矽烷偶聯劑相對於樹脂100質量份較佳為0.1~20質量份,更佳為1~10質量份的範圍。若為0.1質量份以上,則能夠賦予與基板的更加充分的黏附性,若為20質量份以下,則於室溫保存時能夠進一步抑制黏度上升等的問題。 矽烷偶聯劑可以僅使用一種,亦可以使用兩種以上。當使用兩種以上時,合計量成為上述範圍為較佳。(Silane Coupling Agent) The photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention may contain a silane coupling agent in order to improve the adhesion to the substrate. Examples of silane coupling agents include the compounds described in paragraphs 0062 to 0073 of JP 2014-191002, the compounds described in paragraphs 0063 to 0071 of International Publication WO2011/080992A1, and JP 2014 -191252, the compound described in paragraphs 0060 to 0061, the compound described in JP 2014-41264, paragraphs 0045 to 0052, and the compound described in international publication WO2014/097594, paragraph 0055. In addition, it is also preferable to use two or more different silane coupling agents as described in paragraphs 0050 to 0058 of JP 2011-128358 A. The silane coupling agent is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 20 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the resin, and more preferably in the range of 1 to 10 parts by mass. If it is 0.1 parts by mass or more, more sufficient adhesion to the substrate can be imparted, and if it is 20 parts by mass or less, problems such as increase in viscosity during storage at room temperature can be further suppressed. Only one type of silane coupling agent may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, the total amount is preferably in the above-mentioned range.

(增感色素) 本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物可以包含增感色素。增感色素吸收特定的活性放射線而成為電子激發狀態。成為電子激發狀態之增感色素與胺產生劑、熱自由基聚合起始劑、光聚合起始劑等接觸,而產生電子轉移、能量轉移、發熱等作用。藉此,胺產生劑、熱自由基聚合起始劑、光聚合起始劑引起化學變化而分解,並生成自由基、酸或鹼。(Sensitizing Dye) The photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention may contain a sensitizing dye. The sensitizing dye absorbs specific active radiation and becomes an electronically excited state. The sensitizing dye in an electronically excited state comes into contact with an amine generator, a thermal radical polymerization initiator, a photopolymerization initiator, etc., to generate electron transfer, energy transfer, heat generation, and the like. Thereby, the amine generator, thermal radical polymerization initiator, and photopolymerization initiator cause chemical changes to decompose, and generate radicals, acids, or bases.

作為較佳的增感色素的例,能夠列舉屬於以下化合物類,並且於300nm至450nm區域具有吸收波長者。例如,多核芳香族類(例如,菲、蒽、芘、苝、三伸苯、9.10-二烷氧基蒽)、呫噸類(例如,螢光素、曙紅、赤蘚紅、玫瑰紅B、孟加拉玫瑰紅)、硫雜蒽酮類(例如,2,4-二乙基硫雜蒽酮)、花青類(例如,硫雜羰花青、氧雜羰花青)、部花青類(例如部花青、羰部花青)、噻嗪類(例如噻嚀、亞甲藍、甲苯胺藍)、吖啶類(例如吖啶橙、氯黃素、吖啶黃素)、蒽醌類(例如蒽醌)、方酸內鎓鹽類(例如方酸內鎓鹽)、香豆素(coumarin)類(例如7-二乙基胺基-4-甲基香豆素)、苯乙烯基苯類、二苯乙烯基苯類、咔唑類等。As an example of a preferable sensitizing dye, those belonging to the following compound classes and having an absorption wavelength in the region of 300 nm to 450 nm can be cited. For example, polynuclear aromatics (e.g., phenanthrene, anthracene, pyrene, perylene, terylene, 9.10-dialkoxyanthracene), xanthenes (e.g., fluorescein, eosin, erythrosine, rose red B , Rose Bengal), thioxanthones (for example, 2,4-diethylthioxanthone), cyanines (for example, thiocarbocyanine, oxacarbocyanine), merocyanines (Such as merocyanine, carbocyanine), thiazides (such as thiazol, methylene blue, toluidine blue), acridines (such as acridine orange, chloroflavin, acriflavin), anthraquinone (Such as anthraquinone), squaraine ylide (such as squaraine ylide), coumarin (such as 7-diethylamino-4-methylcoumarin), styrene Base benzenes, stilbene benzenes, carbazoles, etc.

當感光性樹脂組成物包含增感色素時,增感色素的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分是0.01~20質量%為較佳,0.1~15質量%為更佳,0.5~10質量%為進一步較佳。增感色素可以單獨使用一種,亦可以使用兩種以上。When the photosensitive resin composition contains a sensitizing dye, the content of the sensitizing dye relative to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 0.01-20% by mass, more preferably 0.1-15% by mass, and 0.5-10 The mass% is more preferable. The sensitizing dye may be used singly, or two or more may be used.

(鏈轉移劑) 本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物可以含有鏈轉移劑。鏈轉移劑例如於高分子辭典第三版(高分子學會編、2005年)683-684頁中被定義。作為鏈轉移劑,例如使用於分子內具有SH、PH、SiH、GeH之化合物組。該些向低活性自由基供給氫而生成自由基,或者氧化之後,藉由去質子而可生成自由基。尤其,能夠較佳地使用硫醇化合物(例如,2-巰基苯并咪唑類、2-巰基苯并噻唑類、2-巰基苯并噁唑類、3-巰基三唑類、5-巰基四唑類等)。(Chain transfer agent) The photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention may contain a chain transfer agent. The chain transfer agent is defined in, for example, pages 683-684 of the third edition of the Polymer Dictionary (edited by the Society of Polymer Science, 2005). As the chain transfer agent, for example, a compound group having SH, PH, SiH, and GeH in the molecule is used. These low-activity free radicals are supplied with hydrogen to generate free radicals, or after oxidation, free radicals can be generated by deprotonation. In particular, thiol compounds (for example, 2-mercaptobenzimidazoles, 2-mercaptobenzothiazoles, 2-mercaptobenzoxazoles, 3-mercaptotriazoles, 5-mercaptotetrazole Class etc.).

當感光性樹脂組成物具有鏈轉移劑時,鏈轉移劑的較佳的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分100質量份,較佳為0.01~20質量份,更佳為1~10質量份,特佳為1~5質量份。 鏈轉移劑可以僅為一種,亦可以是兩種以上。當鏈轉移劑為兩種以上時,其合計範圍是上述範圍為較佳。When the photosensitive resin composition has a chain transfer agent, the preferred content of the chain transfer agent is preferably 0.01-20 parts by mass, more preferably 1-10 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition Parts by mass, particularly preferably 1 to 5 parts by mass. The chain transfer agent may be only one type or two or more types. When there are two or more chain transfer agents, it is preferable that the total range thereof is the above-mentioned range.

(界面活性劑) 從提高塗佈性的觀點考慮,本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物中,可以添加各種界面活性劑。作為界面活性劑,能夠使用氟系界面活性劑、非離子系界面活性劑、陽離子系界面活性劑、陰離子系界面活性劑、矽系界面活性劑等各種界面活性劑。(Surfactant) From the viewpoint of improving coatability, various surfactants can be added to the photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention. As the surfactant, various surfactants such as fluorine-based surfactants, nonionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, anionic surfactants, and silicon-based surfactants can be used.

當感光性樹脂組成物具有界面活性劑時,界面活性劑的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分,是0.001~2.0質量%為較佳,更佳為0.005~1.0質量%。 界面活性劑可以僅為一種,亦可以是兩種以上。當界面活性劑為兩種以上時,其合計範圍是上述範圍為較佳。When the photosensitive resin composition has a surfactant, the content of the surfactant relative to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 0.001 to 2.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005 to 1.0% by mass. The surfactant may be only one type or two or more types. When there are two or more surfactants, it is preferable that the total range thereof is the above-mentioned range.

(高級脂肪酸衍生物) 為了防止因氧引起之聚合抑制,本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物中,可以添加如山嵛酸或山嵛酸醯胺那樣的高級脂肪酸衍生物而於塗佈後的乾燥過程中局部存在於組成物的表面。 當感光性樹脂組成物具有高級脂肪酸衍生物時,高級脂肪酸衍生物的含量相對於感光性樹脂組成物的總固體成分,是0.1~10質量%為較佳。 高級脂肪酸衍生物可以僅為一種,亦可以是兩種以上。當高級脂肪酸衍生物為兩種以上時,其合計範圍是上述範圍為較佳。(Higher fatty acid derivatives) In order to prevent polymerization inhibition due to oxygen, the photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention may be added with higher fatty acid derivatives such as behenic acid or behenic acid amide after coating Partially exists on the surface of the composition during the drying process. When the photosensitive resin composition has a higher fatty acid derivative, the content of the higher fatty acid derivative relative to the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass. There may be only one type of higher fatty acid derivative, or two or more types. When there are two or more higher fatty acid derivatives, the total range is preferably the above range.

<<<感光性樹脂組成物的特性>>> 接著,對本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物的特性進行說明。 本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物藉由曝光而構建交聯結構來降低針對有機溶劑的溶解度為較佳。藉由具有交聯結構,積層有感光性樹脂組成物層時,能夠提高層間的黏附力。又,藉由曝光而降低感光性樹脂組成物層針對有機溶劑的溶解度,藉此於增加積層數量之情況下設置較深的槽或較深的孔時有利。 從塗佈面性狀的觀點考慮,本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物的水分含量小於5質量%為較佳,小於1質量%為更佳,小於0.6質量%為特佳。<<<Characteristics of the photosensitive resin composition>>> Next, the characteristics of the photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention will be described. The photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention is preferably exposed to light to construct a cross-linked structure to reduce the solubility to an organic solvent. By having a crosslinked structure, when the photosensitive resin composition layer is laminated, the adhesion between the layers can be improved. In addition, the solubility of the photosensitive resin composition layer in the organic solvent is reduced by exposure, which is advantageous when a deeper groove or a deeper hole is provided when the number of layers is increased. From the viewpoint of coating surface properties, the moisture content of the photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention is preferably less than 5% by mass, more preferably less than 1% by mass, and particularly preferably less than 0.6% by mass.

從絕緣性的觀點考慮,本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物的金屬含量小於5質量ppm(parts per million)為較佳,小於1質量ppm為更佳,小於0.5質量ppm為特佳。作為金屬,可列舉鈉、鉀、鎂、鈣、鐵、鉻、鎳等。當包含複數個金屬時,該些金屬的合計為上述範圍為較佳。 又,作為減少意外包含於感光性樹脂組成物之金屬雜質之方法,能夠列舉作為構成感光性樹脂組成物之原料而選擇金屬含量較少的原料,對構成感光性樹脂組成物之原料進行濾波器過濾,用聚四氟乙烯對裝置內進行內襯而於盡可能抑制了污染之條件下進行蒸餾等方法。From the viewpoint of insulation, the photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention preferably has a metal content of less than 5 mass ppm (parts per million), more preferably less than 1 mass ppm, and particularly preferably less than 0.5 mass ppm. Examples of metals include sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, iron, chromium, nickel, and the like. When a plurality of metals are included, the total of these metals is preferably in the above-mentioned range. In addition, as a method of reducing the metal impurities accidentally included in the photosensitive resin composition, it can be cited as the raw material constituting the photosensitive resin composition, selecting a raw material with a low metal content, and filtering the raw material constituting the photosensitive resin composition. Filtration, lining the device with polytetrafluoroethylene, and distilling under the condition of suppressing pollution as much as possible.

從配線腐蝕性的觀點考慮,本發明中所使用之感光性樹脂組成物中,鹵素原子的含量小於500質量ppm為較佳,小於300質量ppm為更佳,小於200質量ppm為特佳。其中,以鹵素離子的狀態存在者是小於5質量ppm為較佳,小於1質量ppm為更佳,小於0.5質量ppm為特佳。作為鹵素原子,可列舉氯原子及溴原子。氯原子及溴原子或氯化物離子及溴化物離子的合計分別為上述範圍為較佳。From the viewpoint of wiring corrosion, the photosensitive resin composition used in the present invention preferably has a halogen atom content of less than 500 ppm by mass, more preferably less than 300 ppm by mass, and particularly preferably less than 200 ppm by mass. Among them, less than 5 mass ppm is preferred for those present in the state of halogen ions, less than 1 mass ppm is more preferred, and less than 0.5 mass ppm is particularly preferred. Examples of the halogen atom include a chlorine atom and a bromine atom. It is preferable that the total of the chlorine atom and the bromine atom or the chloride ion and the bromide ion be in the above-mentioned ranges.

<<乾燥製程>> 本發明的積層體的製造方法中,可以包括於形成感光性樹脂組成物之後,對溶劑進行乾燥之製程。較佳的乾燥溫度是50~150℃,70~130℃為更佳,90~110℃為進一步較佳。作為乾燥時間,30秒鐘~20分鐘為較佳,1分鐘~10分鐘為更佳,3分鐘~7分鐘為進一步較佳。<<Drying process>> In the manufacturing method of the laminate of the present invention, a process of drying the solvent after forming the photosensitive resin composition may be included. The preferred drying temperature is 50-150°C, more preferably 70-130°C, and even more preferably 90-110°C. The drying time is preferably 30 seconds to 20 minutes, more preferably 1 minute to 10 minutes, and more preferably 3 minutes to 7 minutes.

<曝光製程> 本發明的積層體的製造方法中,包括對感光性樹脂組成物層進行曝光之曝光製程。曝光的條件並無特別限定,使相對於感光性樹脂組成物的曝光部的顯影液之溶解度改變為較佳,能夠對感光性樹脂組成物的曝光部進行硬化為更佳。例如,關於曝光,相對於感光性樹脂組成物層,照射以於波長365nm下的曝光能量換算為100~10000mJ/cm2 為較佳,照射200~8000mJ/cm2 為更佳。 關於曝光波長,於190~1000nm的範圍內能夠適當設定,240~550nm為較佳。<Exposure Process> The manufacturing method of the laminate of the present invention includes an exposure process for exposing the photosensitive resin composition layer. The conditions of exposure are not particularly limited, but it is better to change the solubility of the developer with respect to the exposed portion of the photosensitive resin composition, and it is more preferable to be able to harden the exposed portion of the photosensitive resin composition. For example, with respect to the photosensitive resin composition layer, the exposure is preferably 100 to 10,000 mJ/cm 2 in terms of exposure energy at a wavelength of 365 nm, and more preferably 200 to 8000 mJ/cm 2 . The exposure wavelength can be appropriately set in the range of 190 to 1000 nm, and 240 to 550 nm is preferable.

可以利用圖案曝光來進行曝光,亦可以利用全面均勻照射而進行曝光。Exposure can be performed by pattern exposure, or exposure can be performed by uniformly irradiating the entire surface.

<顯影處理製程> 本發明的積層體的製造方法中,包括對所曝光之感光性樹脂組成物層進行顯影處理之顯影處理製程。 顯影處理製程是負型顯影處理製程為較佳。藉由進行負型顯影處理製程,未曝光之部分(非曝光部)被去除。顯影方法並無特別限制,能夠形成所希望的圖案為較佳,例如能夠採用攪拌、噴塗、浸漬、超音波等顯影方法。 本發明中,於利用全面均勻照射而進行曝光時亦進行顯影處理製程為較佳。 顯影使用顯影液進行為較佳。顯影液只要是去除了未曝光之部分(非曝光部)者,則能夠無特別限制地使用。基於有機溶劑之顯影為較佳,作為酯類,例如可列舉乙酸乙酯、乙酸正丁酯、乙酸異丁酯、甲酸戊酯、乙酸異戊酯、丙酸丁酯、丁酸異丙酯、丁酸乙酯、丁酸丁酯、乳酸甲酯、乳酸乙酯、γ-丁內酯、ε-己內酯,δ-戊內酯、烷氧基乙酸烷基酯(例:烷氧基乙酸甲酯、烷氧基乙酸乙酯、烷氧基乙酸丁酯(例如,甲氧基乙酸甲酯、甲氧基乙酸乙酯、甲氧基乙酸丁酯、乙氧基乙酸甲酯、乙氧基乙酸乙酯等))、3-烷氧基丙酸烷基酯類(例:3-烷氧基丙酸甲酯、3-烷氧基丙酸乙酯等(例如,3-甲氧基丙酸甲酯、3-甲氧基丙酸乙酯、3-乙氧基丙酸甲酯、3-乙氧基丙酸乙酯等))、2-烷氧基丙酸烷基酯類(例:2-烷氧基丙酸甲酯、2-烷氧基丙酸乙酯、2-烷氧基丙酸丙酯等(例如,2-甲氧基丙酸甲酯、2-甲氧基丙酸乙酯、2-甲氧基丙酸丙酯、2-乙氧基丙酸甲酯、2-乙氧基丙酸乙酯))、2-烷氧基-2-甲基丙酸甲酯及2-烷氧基-2-甲基丙酸乙酯(例如,2-甲氧基-2-甲基丙酸甲酯、2-乙氧基-2-甲基丙酸乙酯等)、丙酮酸甲酯、丙酮酸乙酯、丙酮酸丙酯、乙醯乙酸甲酯、乙醯乙酸乙酯、2-氧代丁酸甲酯、2-氧代丁酸乙酯等,以及作為醚類,例如可列舉二乙二醇二甲醚、四氫呋喃、乙二醇單甲醚、乙二醇單乙醚、甲基溶纖劑乙酸酯、乙基溶纖劑乙酸酯、二乙二醇單甲醚、二乙二醇單乙醚、二乙二醇單丁醚、丙二醇單甲醚、丙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯、丙二醇單乙醚乙酸酯、丙二醇單丙醚乙酸酯等。 作為酮類,例如可列舉甲基乙基酮、環己酮、環戊酮、2-庚酮、3-庚酮、N-甲基-2-吡咯啶酮等。 作為芳香族烴類,例如可列舉甲苯、二甲苯、大茴香醚、檸檬烯等。 作為亞碸類,可較佳地列舉二甲基亞碸。 其中,3-乙氧基丙酸甲酯、3-乙氧基丙酸乙酯、乙基溶纖劑乙酸酯、乳酸乙酯、二乙二醇二甲醚、乙酸丁酯、3-甲氧基丙酸甲酯、2-庚酮、環己酮、環戊酮、γ-丁內酯、二甲基亞碸、乙基卡必醇乙酸酯、丁基卡必醇乙酸酯、丙二醇甲醚及丙二醇甲醚乙酸酯為較佳,環戊酮、γ-丁內酯為更佳。 顯影時間是10秒鐘~5分鐘為較佳。 顯影時的溫度並無特別限定,通常能夠於20~40℃下進行。 於使用了顯影液之處理之後,進而可以進行沖洗。沖洗以與顯影液不同之溶劑進行為較佳。例如,能夠使用感光性樹脂組成物中所含有之溶劑進行沖洗。沖洗時間是5秒鐘~1分鐘為較佳。<Development process> The manufacturing method of the laminate of the present invention includes a development process of developing the exposed photosensitive resin composition layer. The development process is preferably a negative development process. By performing a negative-tone development process, the unexposed part (non-exposed part) is removed. The development method is not particularly limited, and it is preferable that a desired pattern can be formed. For example, a development method such as stirring, spraying, dipping, and ultrasonic wave can be used. In the present invention, it is better to also perform a development process when the exposure is performed by uniform irradiation on the entire surface. The development is preferably performed using a developer. The developer can be used without particular limitation as long as the unexposed part (non-exposed part) is removed. Development based on organic solvents is preferred. Examples of esters include ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, pentyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, Ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, γ-butyrolactone, ε-caprolactone, δ-valerolactone, alkyl alkoxy acetate (example: alkoxy acetic acid Methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl alkoxyacetate, butyl alkoxyacetate (for example, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethoxy Ethyl acetate, etc.)), 3-alkoxypropionic acid alkyl esters (e.g. 3-alkoxy methyl propionate, 3-alkoxy ethyl propionate, etc. (e.g., 3-methoxy propionate Methyl ester, ethyl 3-methoxypropionate, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, etc.), 2-alkoxypropionic acid alkyl esters (examples :Methyl 2-alkoxypropionate, ethyl 2-alkoxypropionate, propyl 2-alkoxypropionate, etc. (for example, methyl 2-methoxypropionate, 2-methoxypropionate Ethyl ester, 2-methoxypropionate, 2-ethoxypropionate, 2-ethoxypropionate)), 2-alkoxy-2-methylpropionate And ethyl 2-alkoxy-2-methylpropionate (for example, methyl 2-methoxy-2-methylpropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxy-2-methylpropionate, etc.), Methyl pyruvate, ethyl pyruvate, propyl pyruvate, methyl acetoacetate, ethyl acetate, methyl 2-oxobutyrate, ethyl 2-oxobutyrate, etc., and as ethers , For example, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol mono Methyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate, etc. Examples of ketones include methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone, and N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone. Examples of aromatic hydrocarbons include toluene, xylene, anisole, limonene, and the like. As the sulfenites, dimethyl sulfenite can preferably be cited. Among them, 3-ethoxy methyl propionate, 3-ethoxy ethyl propionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, 3-methyl Methyl oxypropionate, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, γ-butyrolactone, dimethyl sulfoxide, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, Propylene glycol methyl ether and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate are preferred, and cyclopentanone and γ-butyrolactone are more preferred. The development time is preferably 10 seconds to 5 minutes. The temperature during development is not particularly limited, and it can usually be performed at 20 to 40°C. After the treatment with the developer, it can be rinsed. Rinsing is preferably performed with a solvent different from the developer. For example, the solvent contained in the photosensitive resin composition can be used for rinsing. The rinse time is preferably 5 seconds to 1 minute.

<硬化製程> 本發明的積層體的製造方法包括對顯影處理後的感光性樹脂組成物層進行硬化之硬化製程。 硬化製程包括對感光性樹脂組成物層進行升溫之升溫製程和於升溫製程後對感光性樹脂組成物層進行冷卻之冷卻製程為較佳。<Curing process> The manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention includes the curing process of hardening the photosensitive resin composition layer after a development process. Preferably, the curing process includes a temperature-rising process of raising the temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer and a cooling process of cooling the photosensitive resin composition layer after the temperature-raising process.

關於硬化製程(尤其升溫製程及保持製程),從防止樹脂的分解的方面考慮,藉由使氮、氦、氬等惰性氣體流過等,於低氧濃度的環境下進行為較佳。氧濃度是50體積ppm以下為較佳,20體積ppm以下為較佳。Regarding the hardening process (especially the heating process and the holding process), from the viewpoint of preventing the decomposition of the resin, it is better to perform it in a low oxygen concentration environment by flowing inert gas such as nitrogen, helium, and argon. The oxygen concentration is preferably 50 volume ppm or less, and preferably 20 volume ppm or less.

<<升溫製程>> 升溫製程是將感光性樹脂組成物層升溫至玻璃化轉變溫度以上的溫度之製程。 升溫製程中,使感光性樹脂組成物層中所含有之樹脂(較佳為聚醯亞胺前驅物及聚苯并噁唑前驅物)進行環化反應為較佳。例如,聚醯亞胺或聚苯并噁唑中,與交聯劑一同加熱時,能夠形成3維網結構。又,還能夠進行未反應之自由基聚合性化合物的硬化等。 升溫製程的最終到達溫度是感光性樹脂組成物層中所含有之樹脂的醯亞胺化溫度為較佳。 升溫製程的最終到達溫度是最高加熱溫度為較佳。作為最高加熱溫度,100~500℃為較佳,150~450℃為更佳,160~350℃為進一步較佳。從應力緩和的觀點考慮,本發明的積層體的製造方法中,升溫製程的最終到達溫度是250℃以下為特佳。<<Temperature increase process>> The temperature increase process is a process of raising the temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer to a temperature higher than the glass transition temperature. In the heating process, it is preferable to subject the resin (preferably a polyimide precursor and a polybenzoxazole precursor) contained in the photosensitive resin composition layer to a cyclization reaction. For example, in polyimide or polybenzoxazole, when heated together with a crosslinking agent, a three-dimensional network structure can be formed. In addition, curing of unreacted radical polymerizable compounds can also be performed. The final temperature of the heating process is preferably the imidization temperature of the resin contained in the photosensitive resin composition layer. The final temperature of the heating process is preferably the highest heating temperature. As the maximum heating temperature, 100 to 500°C is preferred, 150 to 450°C is more preferred, and 160 to 350°C is even more preferred. From the viewpoint of stress relaxation, in the method of manufacturing a laminate of the present invention, it is particularly preferable that the final temperature of the heating process is 250° C. or lower.

關於升溫,從20~150℃的溫度至最高加熱溫度以1~12℃/分鐘的升溫速度進行為較佳,2~11℃/分鐘為更佳,3~10℃/分鐘為進一步較佳。藉由將升溫速度設為1℃/分鐘以上,能夠確保生產性的同時防止胺的過度揮發,藉由將升溫速度設為12℃/分鐘以下,能夠緩和硬化膜的殘留應力。 加熱開始時的溫度是20~150℃為較佳,20℃~130℃為更佳,25℃~120℃為進一步較佳。加熱開始時的溫度是指開始直至最高加熱溫度進行加熱之製程時的加熱溫度。例如,將感光性樹脂組成物應用於基板上之後,使其乾燥時,為該乾燥後的溫度,例如,從感光性樹脂組成物中所含有之溶劑的沸點-(30~200)℃逐漸升溫為較佳。Regarding the temperature increase, it is preferable to proceed from a temperature of 20 to 150°C to the maximum heating temperature at a temperature increase rate of 1 to 12°C/min, more preferably 2 to 11°C/min, and still more preferably 3 to 10°C/min. By setting the heating rate to 1°C/min or more, it is possible to prevent excessive volatilization of amine while ensuring productivity, and by setting the heating rate to 12°C/min or less, the residual stress of the cured film can be alleviated. The temperature at the start of heating is preferably 20 to 150°C, more preferably 20 to 130°C, and even more preferably 25 to 120°C. The temperature at the beginning of heating refers to the heating temperature at the beginning of the heating process up to the maximum heating temperature. For example, when the photosensitive resin composition is applied to the substrate and dried, the temperature after drying is used, for example, the temperature is gradually increased from the boiling point of the solvent contained in the photosensitive resin composition-(30 to 200)°C For better.

加熱可以分階段進行。作為例,可以進行如下前處理製程,亦即直至25℃~180℃以3℃/分鐘進行升溫,於180℃下放置60分鐘,且直至180~200℃以2℃/分鐘進行升溫,於200℃下放置120分鐘。作為前處理製程的加熱的溫度是100~200℃為較佳,110~190℃為更佳,120~185℃為最佳。於該前處理製程中,如美國專利9159547號中所記載那樣照射UV的同時進行處理亦為較佳。藉由這種前處理製程,能夠提高硬化膜的特性。前處理製程於10秒鐘~2小時左右的較短的時間內進行為較佳,15秒鐘~30分鐘為更佳。前處理製程可以是兩個階段以上的步驟,例如於100~150℃的範圍進行前處理製程1,之後於150~200℃的範圍進行前處理製程2。Heating can be carried out in stages. As an example, the following pre-treatment process can be carried out, that is, the temperature is raised at 3°C/min until 25°C to 180°C, placed at 180°C for 60 minutes, and the temperature is raised at 2°C/min until 180°C to 200°C. Place it at ℃ for 120 minutes. The heating temperature of the pretreatment process is preferably 100-200°C, more preferably 110-190°C, and most preferably 120-185°C. In the pre-treatment process, it is also preferable to perform treatment while irradiating UV as described in US Patent No. 9159547. Through this pretreatment process, the characteristics of the cured film can be improved. The pretreatment process is preferably carried out in a relatively short time of about 10 seconds to 2 hours, and more preferably 15 seconds to 30 minutes. The pre-treatment process can be a two-stage or more step, for example, the pre-treatment process 1 is performed in the range of 100-150°C, and then the pre-treatment process 2 is performed in the range of 150-200°C.

升溫製程是20~200分鐘為較佳,20~100分鐘為更佳,20~60分鐘為特佳。The heating process is preferably 20 to 200 minutes, more preferably 20 to 100 minutes, and particularly preferably 20 to 60 minutes.

<<保持製程>> 本發明的積層體的製造方法中,於升溫製程後,冷卻製程前包括以與升溫製程的最終到達溫度相等的保持溫度進行保持之保持製程為較佳。 達到升溫製程的最終到達溫度之後,以與升溫製程的最終到達溫度相等的保持溫度進行30~360分鐘的加熱為較佳,進行30~300分鐘的加熱為更佳,進行30~240分鐘的加熱為特佳,進行60~240分鐘的加熱為進一步特佳。 將保持製程中所需要之時間稱為保持時間。 保持製程中的保持溫度是150~450℃為較佳,160~350℃為進一步較佳。從應力緩和的觀點考慮,本發明的積層體的製造方法中,保持製程中的保持溫度是250℃以下為特佳。<<Holding process>> In the method of manufacturing a laminate of the present invention, after the temperature rising process, before the cooling process, it is preferable to include a holding process of maintaining a holding temperature equal to the final temperature of the temperature rising process. After reaching the final temperature of the heating process, it is better to perform heating for 30 to 360 minutes at a holding temperature equal to the final temperature of the heating process, more preferably to perform heating for 30 to 300 minutes, and heating for 30 to 240 minutes It is particularly preferred, and heating for 60 to 240 minutes is further particularly preferred. The time required in the holding process is called holding time. The holding temperature in the holding process is preferably 150-450°C, and more preferably 160-350°C. From the viewpoint of stress relaxation, in the method of manufacturing the laminate of the present invention, it is particularly preferable that the holding temperature in the holding process is 250° C. or lower.

<<冷卻製程>> 冷卻製程是於升溫製程後以2℃/分鐘以下的降溫速度對感光性樹脂組成物層進行冷卻之製程。 冷卻製程的降溫速度是2℃/分鐘以下為較佳,1℃/分鐘以下為更佳。從應力緩和的觀點考慮,冷卻製程的降溫速度是0.1℃/分鐘以上為較佳。 從應力緩和的觀點考慮,冷卻製程的降溫速度比升溫製程的升溫速度慢為較佳。<<Cooling process>> The cooling process is a process of cooling the photosensitive resin composition layer at a cooling rate of 2°C/min or less after the heating process. The cooling rate of the cooling process is preferably 2°C/min or less, and more preferably 1°C/min or less. From the viewpoint of stress relaxation, the cooling rate of the cooling process is preferably 0.1°C/min or more. From the viewpoint of stress relaxation, it is better that the cooling rate of the cooling process is slower than that of the heating process.

冷卻製程是30~600分鐘為較佳,60~600分鐘為更佳,120~600分鐘為特佳。 從應力緩和的觀點考慮,本發明的積層體的製造方法中,冷卻製程的時間比升溫製程的時間長為較佳。The cooling process is preferably 30 to 600 minutes, more preferably 60 to 600 minutes, and particularly preferably 120 to 600 minutes. From the viewpoint of stress relaxation, in the method of manufacturing a laminate of the present invention, it is preferable that the time of the cooling process is longer than the time of the heating process.

冷卻製程的最終到達溫度比硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層(硬化膜)的玻璃化轉變溫度(Tg)低30℃以上為較佳。若直至冷卻製程的最終到達溫度比感光性樹脂組成物層的Tg低30℃以上的溫度進行降溫,則聚醯亞胺充分硬化,且容易抑制產生層間剝離。 冷卻製程的最終到達溫度比硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的玻璃化轉變溫度低160~250℃為更佳,低180~230℃為特佳。The final temperature of the cooling process is preferably 30° C. or more lower than the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the photosensitive resin composition layer (cured film) after the curing process. If the temperature is lowered by 30°C or more lower than the Tg of the photosensitive resin composition layer until the final reaching temperature of the cooling process, the polyimide will be sufficiently cured and the generation of interlayer delamination will be easily suppressed. The final temperature of the cooling process is preferably 160-250°C lower than the glass transition temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process, and particularly preferably 180-230°C lower.

<<設為室溫之製程>> 包括感光性樹脂組成物層達到冷卻製程的最終到達溫度之後,以任意降溫速度對感光性樹脂組成物層進行冷卻而設為室溫之製程為較佳。 設為室溫之製程的降溫速度並無特別限制,比冷卻製程的降溫速度快為較佳。設為室溫之製程的降溫速度例如能夠設為5~10℃/分鐘。<<Process set to room temperature>> After the photosensitive resin composition layer reaches the final temperature of the cooling process, it is preferable to cool the photosensitive resin composition layer at any temperature drop rate to set it to room temperature. The cooling rate of the process set to room temperature is not particularly limited, and it is better to be faster than the cooling rate of the cooling process. The temperature drop rate of the process set to room temperature can be set to, for example, 5 to 10°C/min.

<金屬層形成製程> 本發明的積層體的製造方法包括藉由氣相成膜於硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的表面形成金屬層之金屬層形成製程, 形成金屬層時的硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的溫度低於硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的玻璃化轉變溫度。<Metal layer formation process> The manufacturing method of the laminated body of the present invention includes a metal layer formation process of forming a metal layer on the surface of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process by vapor phase film formation, and a curing process during the formation of the metal layer The temperature of the later photosensitive resin composition layer is lower than the glass transition temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process.

本發明的積層體的製造方法中,形成金屬層時的感光性樹脂組成物層的溫度比感光性樹脂組成物層的玻璃化轉變溫度低30℃以上為較佳,低30~200℃ 為更佳,低100~200℃為特佳。 當於金屬層形成製程中形成之金屬層是2層以上時,至少形成與硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層直接接觸之金屬層(較佳為阻擋金屬膜)時的硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的溫度是上述範圍為較佳。當於金屬層形成製程中形成之金屬層是2層以上時,形成第2層金屬層時的硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的溫度並無特別限制。但是,即使為第2層金屬層,若存在直接設置於感光性樹脂組成物層上之部分時,形成第2層金屬層時的硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的溫度亦是上述範圍為較佳。 尤其使用氣相成膜來形成第2層金屬層時,形成第2層金屬層時的硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的溫度亦是上述範圍為較佳。此外,使用非氣相成膜(電鍍等)形成第2層金屬層時,通常形成第2層金屬層時的硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的溫度成為低於感光性樹脂組成物層的玻璃化轉變溫度之溫度。In the method for producing a laminate of the present invention, the temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer when forming the metal layer is preferably 30°C or more lower than the glass transition temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer, and more preferably 30 to 200°C lower Good, particularly good when the temperature is lower than 100~200℃. When the metal layer formed in the metal layer forming process is two or more layers, at least the metal layer (preferably a barrier metal film) directly in contact with the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process is formed. The temperature of the sexual resin composition layer is preferably in the above-mentioned range. When there are two or more metal layers formed in the metal layer forming process, the temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the hardening process when forming the second metal layer is not particularly limited. However, even if it is the second metal layer, if there is a portion directly provided on the photosensitive resin composition layer, the temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process when forming the second metal layer is also in the above range For better. In particular, when vapor phase film formation is used to form the second metal layer, it is preferable that the temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process when forming the second metal layer is also within the above-mentioned range. In addition, when the second metal layer is formed by non-vapor phase film formation (electroplating, etc.), the temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process when the second metal layer is formed is generally lower than that of the photosensitive resin composition layer The temperature of the glass transition temperature.

作為於金屬層形成製程中形成之金屬層,並無特別限定,能夠使用已有的金屬。作為於金屬層形成製程中形成之金屬層所包含之金屬,例示銅、鋁、鎳、釩、鈦、鉭、鉻、鈷、金及鎢以及包括它們中的至少一種之化合物(包括合金)。本發明的積層體的製造方法中,於金屬層形成製程中形成之金屬層包含鈦、鉭及銅以及包括它們中的至少一種之化合物中的至少一種為更佳,包含鈦及銅以及包括它們中的至少一種之化合物中的至少一種為特佳,包含銅為進一步特佳。作為金屬層包含鈦、鉭及銅以及包括它們中的至少一種之化合物中的至少一種時的具體例,可列舉包括鈦、鉭、銅、TiN、TaN或TiW之金屬層,是包括鈦、鉭、銅、TiN或TiW之金屬層為較佳。於金屬層形成製程中形成之金屬層所包含之金屬可以是一種,亦可以是兩種以上。The metal layer formed in the metal layer forming process is not particularly limited, and existing metals can be used. As the metal included in the metal layer formed in the metal layer forming process, copper, aluminum, nickel, vanadium, titanium, tantalum, chromium, cobalt, gold, and tungsten, and compounds (including alloys) including at least one of them are exemplified. In the method for manufacturing the laminate of the present invention, the metal layer formed in the metal layer forming process preferably includes at least one of titanium, tantalum, and copper, and compounds including at least one of them, including titanium and copper, and including them At least one of the at least one compound is particularly preferred, and it is further particularly preferred to include copper. As a specific example when the metal layer contains at least one of titanium, tantalum, and copper, and a compound containing at least one of them, a metal layer including titanium, tantalum, copper, TiN, TaN, or TiW can be cited. , Copper, TiN or TiW metal layer is preferred. The metal contained in the metal layer formed in the metal layer forming process may be one type or two or more types.

本發明的積層體的製造方法中,於金屬層形成製程中形成之金屬層的厚度是50~2000nm為較佳,50~1000nm為更佳,100~300nm為特佳。 本發明的積層體的製造方法中,於金屬層形成製程中形成之金屬層可以是1層,亦可以是2層以上。 當於金屬層形成製程中形成之金屬層是1層時,將金屬層用作阻擋金屬膜為較佳。 當於金屬層形成製程中形成之金屬層是2層以上時,於金屬層形成製程中形成之金屬層整體的厚度是上述範圍為較佳。當於金屬層形成製程中形成之金屬層是2層以上時,於金屬層形成製程中形成之金屬層是阻擋金屬膜和種子層的積層體為較佳。 阻擋金屬膜是能夠縮短金屬針對硬化膜的侵入長度之層為較佳。關於阻擋金屬膜的金屬的種類,作為於金屬層形成製程中形成之金屬層所包含之金屬而是上述之金屬為較佳。阻擋金屬膜的厚度是50~2000nm為較佳,50~1000nm為更佳,100~300nm為特佳。 種子層是用於輕鬆地形成於第2金屬層形成製程中形成之第2金屬層的圖案之層為較佳。種子層的金屬的種類是與於第2金屬層形成製程中形成之第2金屬層相同種類的金屬為較佳。種子層的厚度是50~2000nm為較佳,50~1000nm為更佳,100~300nm為特佳。In the manufacturing method of the laminated body of the present invention, the thickness of the metal layer formed in the metal layer forming process is preferably 50-2000 nm, more preferably 50-1000 nm, and particularly preferably 100-300 nm. In the manufacturing method of the laminate of the present invention, the metal layer formed in the metal layer forming process may be one layer or two or more layers. When the metal layer formed in the metal layer forming process is one layer, the metal layer is preferably used as the barrier metal film. When the metal layer formed in the metal layer forming process has two or more layers, the thickness of the entire metal layer formed in the metal layer forming process is preferably in the above-mentioned range. When the metal layer formed in the metal layer forming process is two or more layers, the metal layer formed in the metal layer forming process is preferably a laminate of a barrier metal film and a seed layer. The barrier metal film is preferably a layer that can shorten the penetration length of the metal into the cured film. Regarding the type of metal of the barrier metal film, the above-mentioned metal is preferable as the metal included in the metal layer formed in the metal layer forming process. The thickness of the barrier metal film is preferably from 50 to 2000 nm, more preferably from 50 to 1000 nm, and particularly preferably from 100 to 300 nm. The seed layer is preferably a layer for easily forming the pattern of the second metal layer formed in the second metal layer forming process. The metal of the seed layer is preferably the same metal as the second metal layer formed in the second metal layer forming process. The thickness of the seed layer is preferably from 50 to 2000 nm, more preferably from 50 to 1000 nm, and particularly preferably from 100 to 300 nm.

金屬層的形成方法並無特別限定,能夠應用已有的氣相成膜的方法。例如,可考慮濺射法、化學氣相沉積法(chemical vapor deposition;CVD)、等離子法及將它們組合之方法等。該些中,從控制膜厚的觀點考慮,金屬層的形成方法是濺射法為較佳。The method of forming the metal layer is not particularly limited, and an existing vapor phase film formation method can be applied. For example, sputtering method, chemical vapor deposition (chemical vapor deposition; CVD), plasma method, and a method of combining them can be considered. Among these, from the viewpoint of controlling the film thickness, the method of forming the metal layer is preferably a sputtering method.

<第2金屬層形成製程> 本發明的積層體的製造方法還包括於金屬層的表面形成第2金屬層之第2金屬層形成製程。<Second metal layer formation process> The manufacturing method of the laminate of the present invention further includes a second metal layer formation process of forming a second metal layer on the surface of the metal layer.

作為於第2金屬層形成製程中形成之第2金屬層,並無特別限定,能夠使用已有的金屬。作為於第2金屬層形成製程中形成之第2金屬層所包含之金屬,例示銅、鋁、鎳、釩、鈦、鉭、鉻、鈷、金及鎢。從作為半導體元件的再配線層而使用本發明的積層體的觀點考慮,本發明的積層體的製造方法中,第2金屬層包含銅為較佳。The second metal layer formed in the second metal layer forming process is not particularly limited, and existing metals can be used. Examples of metals included in the second metal layer formed in the second metal layer forming process include copper, aluminum, nickel, vanadium, titanium, tantalum, chromium, cobalt, gold, and tungsten. From the viewpoint of using the laminate of the present invention as a rewiring layer of a semiconductor element, in the method of manufacturing the laminate of the present invention, it is preferable that the second metal layer contains copper.

積層體的製造方法中,於第2金屬層形成製程中形成之第2金屬層的厚度例如是3~50μm,3~10μm為較佳,5~10μm為更佳,5~7μm為特佳。當製造功率半導體用途的積層體時,於第2金屬層形成製程中形成之第2金屬層的厚度是35~50μm為較佳。In the manufacturing method of the laminate, the thickness of the second metal layer formed in the second metal layer forming process is, for example, 3-50 μm, preferably 3-10 μm, more preferably 5-10 μm, and particularly preferably 5-7 μm. When manufacturing a laminated body for power semiconductors, the thickness of the second metal layer formed in the second metal layer forming process is preferably 35-50 μm.

第2金屬層的形成方法並無特別限定,能夠應用已有的方法。例如,能夠使用日本特開2007-157879號公報、日本特表2001-521288號公報、日本特開2004-214501號公報、日本特開2004-101850號公報中所記載之方法。例如,可考慮光微影法、剝離法、化學氣相沉積法(chemical vapor deposition;CVD)、電解電鍍、無電解電鍍、蝕刻、印刷及將它們組合之方法等。更具體而言,可列舉組合光微影法及蝕刻而成之圖案化方法、組合光微影法和電解電鍍而成之圖案化方法、組合光微影法、電解電鍍及蝕刻而成之圖案化方法。 作為組合光微影法及電解電鍍而成之圖案化方法,使用濺射法形成於金屬層形成製程中形成之金屬層的種子層之後,使用光微影法形成種子層的圖案,並對形成有圖案之種子層上實施電解電鍍而形成第2金屬層之方法為較佳。然後,可以進一步進行蝕刻而去除未形成有第2金屬層之區域的種子層。The method of forming the second metal layer is not particularly limited, and existing methods can be applied. For example, the methods described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2007-157879, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2001-521288, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2004-214501, and Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2004-101850 can be used. For example, photolithography, lift-off, chemical vapor deposition (CVD), electrolytic plating, electroless plating, etching, printing, and a combination of them can be considered. More specifically, the patterning method by combining photolithography and etching, the patterning method by combining photolithography and electrolytic plating, the combined photolithography method, electroplating and etching patterns can be mentioned.化 method. As a patterning method that combines photolithography and electrolytic plating, after sputtering is used to form the seed layer of the metal layer formed in the metal layer formation process, the photolithography method is used to form the pattern of the seed layer, and the formation The method of electrolytic plating on the patterned seed layer to form the second metal layer is preferred. Then, etching may be further performed to remove the seed layer in the region where the second metal layer is not formed.

<表面活性化處理製程> 積層體的製造方法可以包括對上述金屬層及感光性樹脂組成物層的至少一部分進行表面活性化處理之表面活性化處理製程。 表面活性化處理製程通常於金屬層形成製程後進行為較佳。可以於上述硬化製程後,對感光性樹脂組成物層進行表面活性化處理製程之後形成金屬層。 表面活性化處理可以僅對金屬層的至少一部分進行,亦可以僅對硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的至少一部分進行,關於金屬層及硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層這兩者,可以分別對至少一部分進行。表面活性化處理對金屬層的至少一部分進行為較佳,對金屬層中進一步於其上形成感光性樹脂組成物層之區域的一部分或全部進行表面活性化處理為更佳。如此,藉由對金屬層的表面進行表面活性化處理,能夠提高與設置於該表面之硬化膜的黏附性。 又,表面活性化處理還對硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層(硬化膜)的一部分或全部進行為較佳。如此,藉由對感光性樹脂組成物層的表面進行表面活性化處理,能夠提高與設置於已進行表面活性化處理之表面之金屬層或硬化膜的黏附性。當進行負型顯影時,曝光部會被進行表面處理,且藉由硬化等而膜的強度得到提高,因此感光性樹脂組成物層(硬化膜)不會受到損傷。 作為表面活性化處理,具體而言,選自各種原料氣體(氧、氫、氬、氮、氮及氫混合氣體以及氬及氧混合氣體等)的等離子處理;電暈放電處理;使用CF4 及O2 混合氣體、NF3 及O2 混合氣體、SF6 、NF3 以及NF3 及O2 混合氣體之蝕刻處理;使用紫外線(ultraviolet;UV)臭氧法之表面處理;浸漬於鹽酸水溶液而去除氧化皮膜之後,對包含具有胺基和硫醇基中的至少一種之化合物之有機表面處理劑進行浸漬的浸漬處理;使用刷子進行之機械性粗面化處理中為較佳。等離子處理為更佳,對原料氣體使用了氧之氧等離子處理為特佳。當為電暈放電處理時,能量是500~200000J/m2 為較佳,1000~100000J/m2 為更佳,10000~50000J/m2 為進一步較佳。<Surface activation treatment process> The manufacturing method of the laminate may include a surface activation treatment process of subjecting at least a part of the metal layer and the photosensitive resin composition layer to a surface activation treatment. The surface activation treatment process is usually performed after the metal layer formation process. After the curing process described above, the photosensitive resin composition layer may be subjected to a surface activation treatment process to form a metal layer. The surface activation treatment may be performed only on at least a part of the metal layer, or may be performed only on at least a part of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process. Regarding both the metal layer and the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process , Can be performed separately for at least a part. The surface activation treatment is preferably performed on at least a part of the metal layer, and it is more preferred to perform the surface activation treatment on a part or all of the area on which the photosensitive resin composition layer is further formed in the metal layer. In this way, by performing surface activation treatment on the surface of the metal layer, the adhesion to the cured film provided on the surface can be improved. In addition, the surface activation treatment is preferably performed on part or all of the photosensitive resin composition layer (cured film) after the curing process. In this way, by subjecting the surface of the photosensitive resin composition layer to surface activation treatment, it is possible to improve the adhesion to the metal layer or the cured film provided on the surface that has been subjected to the surface activation treatment. When negative-tone development is performed, the exposed part is surface-treated, and the strength of the film is improved by curing or the like, so the photosensitive resin composition layer (cured film) is not damaged. As the surface activation treatment, specifically, plasma treatment selected from various raw material gases (oxygen, hydrogen, argon, nitrogen, nitrogen and hydrogen mixed gas, argon and oxygen mixed gas, etc.); corona discharge treatment; using CF 4 and Etching treatment of O 2 mixed gas, NF 3 and O 2 mixed gas, SF 6 , NF 3 and NF 3 and O 2 mixed gas; surface treatment using ultraviolet (ultraviolet; UV) ozone method; immersed in hydrochloric acid aqueous solution to remove oxidation After the coating, the organic surface treatment agent containing at least one of an amine group and a thiol group is dipped into an organic surface treatment agent; the mechanical roughening treatment using a brush is preferable. Plasma treatment is better, and oxygen plasma treatment using oxygen for the raw material gas is particularly preferred. In the case of corona discharge treatment, the energy is preferably 500 to 200,000 J/m 2 , more preferably 1,000 to 100,000 J/m 2, and even more preferably 10,000 to 50,000 J/m 2 .

<積層製程> 本發明的積層體的製造方法中,於金屬層形成製程後,進一步再次依序進行之感光性樹脂組成物層形成製程、曝光製程、顯影處理製程、硬化製程及金屬層形成製程為較佳。該情況下,反覆進行金屬層形成製程,因此尤其能夠抑制積層有基板、硬化膜及金屬層時的層間剝離之效果較大。 本說明書中,將於金屬層形成製程後,進一步再次依序進行之感光性樹脂組成物層形成製程、曝光製程、顯影處理製程、硬化製程及金屬層形成製程之製程稱為積層製程。積層製程是依序進行之感光性樹脂組成物層形成製程、曝光製程、顯影處理製程、硬化製程、金屬層形成製程及第2金屬層形成製程之製程為更佳。<Layering process> In the method of manufacturing a laminate of the present invention, after the metal layer forming process, the photosensitive resin composition layer forming process, the exposure process, the development process, the hardening process, and the metal layer forming process are further performed in sequence again For better. In this case, the metal layer forming process is repeatedly performed, and therefore, the effect of preventing interlayer peeling when the substrate, the cured film, and the metal layer are laminated is particularly effective. In this specification, after the metal layer forming process, the photosensitive resin composition layer forming process, the exposure process, the developing process, the hardening process, and the metal layer forming process are called the build-up process. The build-up process is preferably a process of forming a photosensitive resin composition layer, an exposure process, a developing process, a hardening process, a metal layer forming process, and a second metal layer forming process in sequence.

於積層製程後,進一步進行積層製程時,於上述曝光製程後或上述金屬層形成製程後,能夠進一步進行上述表面活性化處理製程。 上述積層製程進行3~7次為較佳,進行3~5次為更佳。 例如,如硬化膜/金屬層/硬化膜/金屬層/硬化膜/金屬層那樣,硬化膜是3層以上且7層以下的結構為較佳,3層以上且5層以下為進一步較佳。越設為多層結構,感光性樹脂組成物層越反覆進行顯影液或金屬蝕刻處理、硬化製程中的高溫處理,因此起到能夠抑制因本發明的積層體的製造方法引起之金屬層/硬化膜界面或硬化膜/硬化膜界面中產生層間剝離的效果。 藉由設為該種結構,能夠將感光性樹脂組成物層(硬化膜)和金屬層交替積層,並能夠用作再配線層等半導體元件的多層配線結構。 關於感光性樹脂組成物層(硬化膜),越往上積層其厚度越變厚為較佳。After the lamination process, when the lamination process is further performed, the surface activation treatment process can be further performed after the exposure process or the metal layer formation process. It is preferable to perform the above-mentioned layering process 3 to 7 times, and more preferably to perform 3 to 5 times. For example, like the cured film/metal layer/cured film/metal layer/cured film/metal layer, the cured film preferably has a structure of 3 layers or more and 7 layers or less, and more preferably 3 layers or more and 5 layers or less. The more the multilayer structure is set, the more the photosensitive resin composition layer is repeatedly subjected to high-temperature processing in the developer or metal etching process and hardening process, so that it can suppress the metal layer/cured film caused by the manufacturing method of the laminate of the present invention. The effect of interlayer peeling occurs at the interface or the cured film/cured film interface. By adopting such a structure, a photosensitive resin composition layer (cured film) and a metal layer can be alternately laminated, and it can be used as a multilayer wiring structure of semiconductor elements such as a rewiring layer. Regarding the photosensitive resin composition layer (cured film), it is preferable that the thickness increases as the layer is stacked upward.

[積層體] 本發明的積層體具有基板、圖案硬化膜及位於圖案硬化膜的表面之金屬層, 圖案硬化膜包含聚醯亞胺或聚苯并噁唑, 構成位於圖案硬化膜的表面之金屬層之金屬針對圖案硬化膜的侵入距離圖案硬化膜的表面為130nm以下。[Laminate] The laminate of the present invention has a substrate, a patterned cured film, and a metal layer on the surface of the patterned cured film. The patterned cured film contains polyimide or polybenzoxazole and constitutes the metal located on the surface of the patterned cured film. The penetration distance of the metal of the layer into the patterned cured film is 130 nm or less from the surface of the patterned cured film.

<圖案硬化膜> 本發明的積層體中的圖案硬化膜是本發明的積層體的製造方法中的硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層為較佳。<Pattern cured film> It is preferable that the pattern cured film in the laminated body of this invention is the photosensitive resin composition layer after a hardening process in the manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention.

<<Tg>> 圖案硬化膜(硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層)的玻璃化轉變溫度是150~300℃為較佳,160~250℃為更佳,180~230℃為特佳。<<Tg>> The glass transition temperature of the pattern cured film (the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process) is preferably 150 to 300°C, more preferably 160 to 250°C, and particularly preferably 180 to 230°C.

<<殘留應力>> 按照雷射測量法測量之圖案硬化膜(硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層。較佳為金屬層形成製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層。更佳為金屬層形成製程及第2金屬層形成製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層)的殘留應力小於35MPa為較佳,小於25MPa為更佳,小於15MPa為特佳。<<Residual stress>> The pattern cured film measured by the laser measurement method (the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process. The photosensitive resin composition layer after the metal layer formation process is preferred. The metal layer formation is more preferred. The residual stress of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the process and the second metal layer formation process is preferably less than 35 MPa, more preferably less than 25 MPa, and particularly preferably less than 15 MPa.

<金屬層> 本發明的積層體中的金屬層是於本發明的積層體的製造方法中的金屬層形成製程中形成之金屬層為較佳。 又,本發明的積層體中的金屬層可以是於本發明的積層體的製造方法中的金屬層形成製程中形成之金屬層和於第2金屬層形成製程中形成之第2金屬層的積層體。該情況下,於本發明的積層體的製造方法中的金屬層形成製程中形成之金屬層和於第2金屬層形成製程中形成之第2金屬層被一體化而可以成為本發明的積層體中的金屬層。 又,於本發明的積層體的製造方法中的金屬層形成製程中形成之金屬層例如是阻擋金屬膜和種子層這2層,當於第2金屬層形成製程中形成之第2金屬層是與種子層相同種類的金屬時,可以是僅種子層和第2金屬層被一體化。該情況下,可以是僅種子層和第2金屬層被一體化之層與阻擋金屬膜的積層體成為本發明的積層體中的金屬層。 作為本發明的積層體中的金屬層的厚度,於壁厚最厚的部分是0.1~50μm為較佳,1~10μm為更佳。 從使金屬層的膜質穩定的觀點考慮,本發明的積層體中的金屬層是平坦的金屬層為較佳。藉由使用濺射法來形成金屬層,能夠形成平坦的金屬層。進而,藉由於形成金屬層時的硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的溫度低於硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的玻璃化轉變溫度的條件下使用濺射法來形成金屬層,能夠形成更加平坦的金屬層。<Metal layer> The metal layer in the laminate of the present invention is preferably the metal layer formed in the metal layer forming process in the method of manufacturing the laminate of the present invention. In addition, the metal layer in the laminate of the present invention may be a laminate of the metal layer formed in the metal layer forming process in the method of manufacturing the laminate of the present invention and the second metal layer formed in the second metal layer forming process body. In this case, the metal layer formed in the metal layer forming process in the manufacturing method of the laminate of the present invention and the second metal layer formed in the second metal layer forming process are integrated to form the laminate of the present invention In the metal layer. In addition, the metal layer formed in the metal layer forming process in the manufacturing method of the laminate of the present invention is, for example, two layers of a barrier metal film and a seed layer. When the second metal layer formed in the second metal layer forming process is In the case of the same type of metal as the seed layer, only the seed layer and the second metal layer may be integrated. In this case, a laminate of only the layer in which the seed layer and the second metal layer are integrated, and the barrier metal film may be the metal layer in the laminate of the present invention. The thickness of the metal layer in the laminate of the present invention is preferably 0.1 to 50 μm at the thickest part, and more preferably 1 to 10 μm. From the viewpoint of stabilizing the film quality of the metal layer, the metal layer in the laminate of the present invention is preferably a flat metal layer. By using a sputtering method to form the metal layer, a flat metal layer can be formed. Furthermore, since the temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process when forming the metal layer is lower than the glass transition temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process, the metal layer is formed by sputtering. A more flat metal layer can be formed.

<金屬針對圖案硬化膜的侵入長度> 構成位於圖案硬化膜的表面之金屬層之金屬針對圖案硬化膜的侵入長度距離圖案硬化膜的表面為130nm以下,50nm以下為較佳,30nm以下為更佳。<The penetration length of the metal into the patterned hardened film> The penetration length of the metal forming the metal layer on the surface of the patterned hardened film into the patterned hardened film is 130nm or less from the surface of the patterned hardened film, preferably 50nm or less, more preferably 30nm or less .

[半導體元件的製造方法] 本發明的半導體元件的製造方法包括本發明的積層體的製造方法。 藉由上述構成,本發明的半導體元件的製造方法提供積層有基板、硬化膜及金屬層時的層間剝離得到抑制之半導體元件。[Method of Manufacturing Semiconductor Element] The method of manufacturing a semiconductor element of the present invention includes the method of manufacturing a laminate of the present invention. With the above configuration, the method for manufacturing a semiconductor element of the present invention provides a semiconductor element in which delamination between the substrate, the cured film, and the metal layer is suppressed when the substrate, the cured film, and the metal layer are laminated.

以下,對藉由本發明的半導體元件的製造方法而得到之半導體元件的一實施方式進行說明。 圖1是表示半導體元件的一實施方式的結構之示意圖。圖1所示之半導體元件100是所謂的3維安裝裝置,且積層有複數個半導體晶片101a~101d之半導體晶片101配置於配線基板120上。 此外,該實施方式中,主要對半導體晶片的積層數為4層的情況進行說明,但半導體晶片的積層數並無特別限定,例如可以是2層、8層、16層、32層等。又,可以是1層。Hereinafter, an embodiment of a semiconductor element obtained by the method of manufacturing a semiconductor element of the present invention will be described. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of an embodiment of a semiconductor element. The semiconductor element 100 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called three-dimensional mounting device, and the semiconductor wafer 101 in which a plurality of semiconductor wafers 101 a to 101 d are laminated is arranged on a wiring board 120. In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the number of layers of the semiconductor wafer is 4 is mainly described, but the number of layers of the semiconductor wafer is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, 2 layers, 8 layers, 16 layers, 32 layers, and the like. Also, it may be one layer.

複數個半導體晶片101a~101d均包括矽基板等半導體晶圓。 最上段的半導體晶片101a不具有貫通電極,且於其一方的面形成有電極焊盤(未圖示)。 半導體晶片101b~101d具有貫通電極102b~102d,且於各半導體晶片的兩面設置有一體設置於貫通電極之連接焊盤(未圖示)。Each of the plurality of semiconductor wafers 101a to 101d includes a semiconductor wafer such as a silicon substrate. The uppermost semiconductor wafer 101a does not have a through electrode, and an electrode pad (not shown) is formed on one surface thereof. The semiconductor wafers 101b to 101d have through electrodes 102b to 102d, and connection pads (not shown) integrally provided with the through electrodes are provided on both surfaces of each semiconductor wafer.

半導體晶片101具有將不具有貫通電極之半導體晶片101a和具有貫通電極102b~102d之半導體晶片101b~101d倒裝晶片接合之結構。 亦即,不具有貫通電極之半導體晶片101a的電極焊盤和具有與其相鄰之貫通電極102b之半導體晶片101b的半導體晶片101a側的連結焊盤藉由焊料凸塊等金屬凸塊103a而連接。具有貫通電極102b之半導體晶片101b的另一側的連接焊盤和具有與其相鄰之貫通電極102c之半導體晶片101c的半導體晶片101b側的連接焊盤藉由焊料凸塊等金屬凸塊103b而連接。同樣地,具有貫通電極102c之半導體晶片101c的另一側的連接焊盤和具有與其相鄰之貫通電極102d之半導體晶片101d的半導體晶片101c側的連接焊盤藉由焊料凸塊等金屬凸塊103c而連接。The semiconductor wafer 101 has a structure in which a semiconductor wafer 101a having no through electrodes and a semiconductor wafer 101b to 101d having through electrodes 102b to 102d are flip-chip bonded. That is, the electrode pads of the semiconductor wafer 101a without through electrodes and the bonding pads on the semiconductor wafer 101a side of the semiconductor wafer 101b with through electrodes 102b adjacent thereto are connected by metal bumps 103a such as solder bumps. The connection pad on the other side of the semiconductor chip 101b with the through electrode 102b and the connection pad on the semiconductor chip 101b side of the semiconductor chip 101c with the through electrode 102c adjacent to it are connected by metal bumps 103b such as solder bumps. . Similarly, the connection pad on the other side of the semiconductor chip 101c with the through electrode 102c and the connection pad on the semiconductor chip 101c side of the semiconductor chip 101d with the through electrode 102d adjacent to it are made of metal bumps such as solder bumps. 103c and connected.

於各半導體晶片101a~101d的間隙中形成有底部填充層110,各半導體晶片101a~101d經由底部填充層110而積層。An underfill layer 110 is formed in the gaps between the semiconductor wafers 101a to 101d, and the semiconductor wafers 101a to 101d are stacked via the underfill layer 110.

半導體晶片101配置於配線基板120上。 作為配線基板120,例如使用將樹脂基板、陶瓷基板、剝離基板等絶縁基板用作基材之多層配線基板。作為應用樹脂基板之配線基板120,可列舉多層銅張積層板(多層印刷配線板)等。The semiconductor wafer 101 is arranged on the wiring substrate 120. As the wiring substrate 120, for example, a multilayer wiring substrate in which an insulating substrate such as a resin substrate, a ceramic substrate, and a peeling substrate is used as a base material is used. As the wiring board 120 to which the resin substrate is applied, a multilayer copper laminate (multilayer printed wiring board) or the like can be cited.

於配線基板120的一方的面中設置有表面電極120a。 於配線基板120與半導體晶片101之間配置有形成有再配線層105之絕緣層115,配線基板120與半導體晶片101經由再配線層105而電連接。作為絕緣層115,能夠使用本發明中的硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層(硬化膜)。作為形成有再配線層105之絕緣層115,能夠使用藉由本發明的積層體的製造方法而得到之積層體。 再配線層105的一端經由焊料凸塊等金屬凸塊103d與形成於半導體晶片101d的再配線層105側的面之電極焊盤連接。又,再配線層105的另一端經由焊料凸塊等金屬凸塊103e與配線基板的表面電極120a連接。 進而,於絕緣層115與半導體晶片101之間形成有底部填充層110a。又,於絕緣層115與配線基板120之間形成有底部填充層110b。A surface electrode 120 a is provided on one surface of the wiring substrate 120. An insulating layer 115 in which a rewiring layer 105 is formed is arranged between the wiring substrate 120 and the semiconductor wafer 101, and the wiring substrate 120 and the semiconductor wafer 101 are electrically connected via the rewiring layer 105. As the insulating layer 115, the photosensitive resin composition layer (cured film) after the curing process in the present invention can be used. As the insulating layer 115 on which the rewiring layer 105 is formed, a laminate obtained by the method of manufacturing a laminate of the present invention can be used. One end of the rewiring layer 105 is connected to an electrode pad formed on the surface of the semiconductor wafer 101d on the side of the rewiring layer 105 via a metal bump 103d such as a solder bump. In addition, the other end of the rewiring layer 105 is connected to the surface electrode 120a of the wiring board via a metal bump 103e such as a solder bump. Furthermore, an underfill layer 110a is formed between the insulating layer 115 and the semiconductor wafer 101. In addition, an underfill layer 110b is formed between the insulating layer 115 and the wiring substrate 120.

圖2是表示藉由本發明的積層體的製造方法而得到之積層體的一實施方式的結構之示意圖。具體而言,圖2是表示將藉由本發明的積層體的製造方法而得到之積層體用作再配線層之一例者。圖2中,200表示藉由本發明的方法得到之積層體,201表示感光性樹脂組成物層(硬化膜),203表示金屬層。圖2中,金屬層203是用斜線表示之層。感光性樹脂組成物層201藉由負型顯影而由所希望的圖案形成。金屬層203以覆蓋上述圖案的表面的一部分的方式形成,於上述金屬層203的表面還積層有感光性樹脂組成物層(硬化膜)201。進而,感光性樹脂組成物層(硬化膜)作為絕緣層而發揮作用,金屬層作為再配線層而發揮作用,且作為再配線層而安裝於如上述那樣的半導體元件。 [實施例]Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of an embodiment of a laminate obtained by the method of manufacturing a laminate of the present invention. Specifically, FIG. 2 shows an example of using the laminate obtained by the method of manufacturing the laminate of the present invention as a rewiring layer. In FIG. 2, 200 denotes a laminate obtained by the method of the present invention, 201 denotes a photosensitive resin composition layer (cured film), and 203 denotes a metal layer. In FIG. 2, the metal layer 203 is a layer indicated by diagonal lines. The photosensitive resin composition layer 201 is formed in a desired pattern by negative-tone development. The metal layer 203 is formed so as to cover a part of the surface of the aforementioned pattern, and a photosensitive resin composition layer (cured film) 201 is further laminated on the surface of the aforementioned metal layer 203. Furthermore, the photosensitive resin composition layer (cured film) functions as an insulating layer, and the metal layer functions as a rewiring layer, and is mounted on the above-mentioned semiconductor element as a rewiring layer. [Example]

以下列舉實施例對本發明進行更加具體的說明。以下實施例中所示出之材料、使用量、比例、處理內容、處理流程等於不脫離本發明的宗旨之範圍內,能夠適當進行變更。因此,本發明的範圍並不限定於以下所示之具體例。「份」、「%」於無特別說明之範圍內,是質量基準。The following examples are given to illustrate the present invention in more detail. The materials, usage amount, ratio, processing content, and processing flow shown in the following embodiments are within the scope of the spirit of the present invention, and can be appropriately changed. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. "Parts" and "%" within the range without special instructions are quality standards.

[實施例1] <聚醯亞胺前驅物的合成> <<源自4,4’-氧代二鄰苯二甲酸二酐、4,4’-二氨基二苯醚及2-甲基丙烯酸羥乙酯之聚醯亞胺前驅物Aa-1(具有自由基聚合性基之聚醯亞胺前驅物)的合成>> 將20.0g(64.5毫莫耳)的4,4’-氧代二鄰苯二甲酸二酐(將4,4’-氧代二鄰苯二甲酸於140℃下乾燥12小時而得到者)、18.6g(129毫莫耳)的2-甲基丙烯酸羥乙酯、0.05g的對苯二酚、10.7g的吡啶及140g的二甘醇二甲醚(二乙二醇二甲醚)進行混合。將混合物於60℃的溫度下攪拌18小時而製造了4,4’-氧代二鄰苯二甲酸和2-甲基丙烯酸羥乙酯的二酯。接著,將反應混合物冷卻至-10℃,將溫度保持在-10±4℃的同時經10分鐘添加了16.12g(135.5毫莫耳)的SOCl2 。用50mL的N-甲基吡咯烷酮對反應混合物進行稀釋之後,將反應混合物於室溫下攪拌了2小時。接著,將於100mL的N-甲基吡咯烷酮中溶解有11.08g(58.7毫莫耳)的4,4’-氧代二苯胺之溶液於20~23℃下經20分鐘滴加於反應混合物中。接著,將反應混合物於室溫下攪拌了1晩。接著,向5升水中添加反應混合物而使聚醯亞胺前驅物沉澱。將水及聚醯亞胺前驅物的混合物以5000rpm的速度攪拌了15分鐘。對水及聚醯亞胺前驅物的混合物進行過濾而去除濾液,向4升水中添加了包含聚醯亞胺前驅物之殘渣。將水及聚醯亞胺前驅物的混合物再次攪拌30分鐘,並再次進行過濾而作為殘渣得到了聚醯亞胺前驅物。接著,將所得到之聚醯亞胺前驅物於減壓下,於45℃下乾燥3天而得到了聚醯亞胺前驅物Aa-1。 以下示出聚醯亞胺前驅物Aa-1的結構。 [化學式49] Aa-1

Figure 02_image097
[Example 1] <Synthesis of polyimide precursor> <<From 4,4'-oxodiphthalic dianhydride, 4,4'-diaminodiphenyl ether and 2-methacrylic acid Synthesis of the polyimine precursor Aa-1 (polyimine precursor with radical polymerizable group) of hydroxyethyl ester>> 20.0g (64.5 millimoles) of 4,4'-oxodi Phthalic dianhydride (obtained by drying 4,4'-oxodiphthalic acid at 140°C for 12 hours), 18.6 g (129 millimoles) of 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 0.05 g of hydroquinone, 10.7 g of pyridine, and 140 g of diglyme (diglyme) were mixed. The mixture was stirred at a temperature of 60°C for 18 hours to produce a diester of 4,4'-oxodiphthalic acid and 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate. Next, the reaction mixture was cooled to -10°C, and 16.12 g (135.5 millimoles) of SOCl 2 was added over 10 minutes while maintaining the temperature at -10±4°C. After the reaction mixture was diluted with 50 mL of N-methylpyrrolidone, the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. Next, a solution of 11.08 g (58.7 millimoles) of 4,4'-oxodiphenylamine dissolved in 100 mL of N-methylpyrrolidone was added dropwise to the reaction mixture at 20-23° C. for 20 minutes. Then, the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for one night. Next, the reaction mixture was added to 5 liters of water to precipitate the polyimide precursor. The mixture of water and polyimide precursor was stirred at a speed of 5000 rpm for 15 minutes. The mixture of water and the polyimide precursor was filtered to remove the filtrate, and the residue containing the polyimide precursor was added to 4 liters of water. The mixture of water and the polyimide precursor was again stirred for 30 minutes, and filtered again to obtain a polyimide precursor as a residue. Next, the obtained polyimide precursor was dried under reduced pressure at 45° C. for 3 days to obtain the polyimide precursor Aa-1. The structure of the polyimide precursor Aa-1 is shown below. [Chemical formula 49] Aa-1
Figure 02_image097

<感光性樹脂組成物的製備> 將下述成分進行混合,並作為均勻地溶液而製備了感光性樹脂組成物。<Preparation of photosensitive resin composition> The following components were mixed, and the photosensitive resin composition was prepared as a uniform solution.

<<感光性樹脂組成物A-1的組成>> 樹脂:聚醯亞胺前驅物(Aa-1) 32質量份 聚合性化合物B-1 6.9質量份 光聚合起始劑C-1 1.0質量份 聚合抑制劑:對苯醌(Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.製) 0.08質量份 遷移抑制劑:1H-四唑(Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.製) 0.12質量份 金屬黏附性改良劑:N-[3-(三乙氧基矽基)丙基]馬來酸單醯胺 0.70質量份 溶劑:γ-丁內酯 48.00質量份 溶劑:二甲基亞碸 12.00質量份<<Composition of photosensitive resin composition A-1>> Resin: polyimide precursor (Aa-1) 32 parts by mass polymerizable compound B-1 6.9 parts by mass photopolymerization initiator C-1 1.0 parts by mass Polymerization inhibitor: p-benzoquinone (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) 0.08 parts by mass migration inhibitor: 1H-tetrazole (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) 0.12 parts by mass Metal adhesion modifier: N -[3-(Triethoxysilyl)propyl]maleic acid monoamide 0.70 parts by mass Solvent: 48.00 parts by mass γ-butyrolactone Solvent: 12.00 parts by mass dimethylsulfene

<<感光性樹脂組成物A-2的組成>> 樹脂:聚醯亞胺前驅物(Aa-1) 32質量份 聚合性化合物B-1 6.9質量份 光聚合起始劑C-1 1.0質量份 聚合抑制劑:2,6-二-第三丁基-4-甲基苯酚(Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.製) 0.1質量份 遷移抑制劑:1H-1,2,4-三唑(Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.製) 0.1質量份 溶劑:γ-丁內酯 48.00質量份 溶劑:二甲基亞碸 12.00質量份<<Composition of photosensitive resin composition A-2>> Resin: polyimide precursor (Aa-1) 32 parts by mass polymerizable compound B-1 6.9 parts by mass photopolymerization initiator C-1 1.0 parts by mass Polymerization inhibitor: 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) 0.1 parts by mass migration inhibitor: 1H-1,2,4-triazole (Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) 0.1 parts by mass solvent: 48.00 parts by mass γ-butyrolactone solvent: 12.00 parts by mass dimethylsulfoxide

各添加劑的詳細內容如下。 B-1:NK酯A-9300(Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.製、3官能丙烯酸酯、下述結構) [化學式50]

Figure 02_image099
The details of each additive are as follows. B-1: NK ester A-9300 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., trifunctional acrylate, the following structure) [Chemical formula 50]
Figure 02_image099

(C)光聚合起始劑 C-1:日本特表2014-500852號公報的0345段中所記載之化合物24 [化學式51]

Figure 02_image101
(C) Photopolymerization initiator C-1: Compound 24 described in paragraph 0345 of JP 2014-500852 A [Chemical formula 51]
Figure 02_image101

<過濾製程> 使各感光性樹脂組成物通過細孔的寬度為0.8μm的濾波器而對其進行了加壓過濾。<Filtering process> Each photosensitive resin composition was filtered under pressure by passing through a filter having a pore width of 0.8 μm.

<感光性樹脂組成物層形成製程> 然後,藉由旋轉塗佈法將各感光性樹脂組成物應用於矽晶圓上而形成為層狀,從而形成了感光性樹脂組成物層。<Photosensitive resin composition layer formation process> Then, each photosensitive resin composition was applied to a silicon wafer by a spin coating method to form a layer, thereby forming a photosensitive resin composition layer.

<乾燥製程> 於加熱板上,於100℃下對具有所得到之感光性樹脂組成物層之矽晶圓進行5分鐘的乾燥,從而於矽晶圓上得到了厚度20μm的均勻的感光性樹脂組成物層。<Drying process> The silicon wafer with the obtained photosensitive resin composition layer was dried on a hot plate at 100°C for 5 minutes to obtain a uniform photosensitive resin with a thickness of 20μm on the silicon wafer Composition layer.

<曝光製程> 接著,使用步進機(Nikon NSR 2005 i9C),以365nm(i射線)的曝光波長,並用500mJ/cm2 的曝光能量對矽晶圓上的感光性樹脂組成物層進行了曝光(全面均勻照射)。 本實施例中,為了輕鬆地測定應力而於全面均勻照射下進行曝光,浸漬於顯影液,並經過硬化製程而形成硬化膜。但是,亦可以進行圖案曝光,並浸漬於顯影液而去除未曝光部,且經過硬化製程而形成已形成有圖案之硬化膜。 與未被圖案化之情況相比,於感光性樹脂組成物層被圖案化之情況下產生更多的界面,並於積層有基板、硬化膜及金屬層時的層間產生接觸面積較少之部位。該情況下,層間剝離變得更容易產生,且更明顯地得到本發明的效果。<Exposure process> Next, a stepper (Nikon NSR 2005 i9C) was used to expose the photosensitive resin composition layer on the silicon wafer with an exposure wavelength of 365nm (i-ray) and an exposure energy of 500mJ/cm 2 (Full and uniform irradiation). In this embodiment, in order to easily measure the stress, the exposure is performed under uniform irradiation on the entire surface, immersed in a developer solution, and undergoes a curing process to form a cured film. However, it is also possible to perform pattern exposure, immerse in a developer solution to remove unexposed parts, and go through a curing process to form a patterned cured film. Compared with the unpatterned case, when the photosensitive resin composition layer is patterned, more interfaces are generated, and the contact area between the layers when the substrate, the cured film and the metal layer are laminated is less. . In this case, delamination becomes easier to occur, and the effect of the present invention is more clearly obtained.

<顯影處理製程> 將已全面曝光之感光性樹脂組成物層於環戊酮中浸漬60秒鐘而進行了顯影處理。<Development process> The photosensitive resin composition layer which has been fully exposed was immersed in cyclopentanone for 60 seconds, and the development process was performed.

<硬化製程> 接著,使用以下(1)~(4)的方法對顯影處理後的感光性樹脂組成物層進行了硬化。<Curing process> Next, the photosensitive resin composition layer after the development process was cured using the following methods (1) to (4).

<<(1)升溫製程>> 首先,於氧濃度20體積ppm以下的氮環境下,將具有顯影處理後的感光性樹脂組成物層之基板置於能夠調整溫度之板上,從室溫(20℃)以10℃/分鐘的升溫速度進行升溫,並經21分鐘加熱至最終到達溫度230℃。<<(1) Heating process>> First, in a nitrogen environment with an oxygen concentration of 20 vol ppm or less, the substrate with the photosensitive resin composition layer after the development treatment is placed on a plate that can adjust the temperature from room temperature ( 20°C) The temperature is increased at a temperature increase rate of 10°C/min, and the temperature is finally reached to 230°C in 21 minutes.

<<(2)保持製程>> 然後,將感光性樹脂組成物層於升溫製程的最終到達溫度(保持溫度)的230℃下維持了3小時。<<(2) Holding process>> Then, the photosensitive resin composition layer was maintained at 230° C., which is the final temperature (holding temperature) of the heating process, for 3 hours.

<<(3)冷卻製程>> 將於保持製程中加熱3小時後的感光性樹脂組成物層從230℃以2℃/分鐘的降溫速度經30分鐘緩慢冷卻至冷卻製程的最終到達溫度170℃。<<(3) Cooling process>> The photosensitive resin composition layer heated for 3 hours in the holding process is slowly cooled from 230°C at a temperature drop rate of 2°C/min over 30 minutes to the final temperature of the cooling process 170°C .

<<(4)設為室溫之製程>> 感光性樹脂組成物層達到冷卻製程的最終到達溫度170℃之後,以5~10℃/分鐘的降溫速度對感光性樹脂組成物層進行冷卻而設為室溫,從而得到了硬化膜。<<(4) Process set to room temperature>> After the photosensitive resin composition layer reaches the final temperature of 170°C in the cooling process, the photosensitive resin composition layer is cooled at a temperature drop rate of 5-10°C/min. It was set to room temperature, and a cured film was obtained.

<金屬層形成製程> 接著,於濺射裝置(AMAT製、產品名Endura)中,於硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層上形成第1層金屬層,該第1層金屬層使用濺射法於感光性樹脂組成物層的溫度成為150℃的條件下對Ti進行100nm成膜而用作阻擋金屬膜,並連續對Cu進行300nm成膜而形成了用作種子層之第2層金屬層。 將於使用濺射法之金屬層形成製程中形成之金屬層整體的厚度設為400nm。 於濺射裝置中,關於感光性樹脂組成物層的溫度,藉由依溫度而變色之密封件(熱標籤、NiGK Corporation)貼合於表面而觀察顏色的變化而測定並求出感光性樹脂組成物層的表面的溫度。<Metal layer formation process> Next, in a sputtering device (manufactured by AMAT, product name Endura), a first metal layer is formed on the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process, and the first metal layer is sputtered Under the condition that the temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer becomes 150°C, Ti is formed into a 100nm film to serve as a barrier metal film, and Cu is continuously formed into a 300nm film to form a second metal layer serving as a seed layer . The thickness of the entire metal layer formed in the metal layer forming process using the sputtering method is set to 400 nm. In the sputtering device, the temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer is measured and obtained by attaching a sealing material (thermal label, NiGK Corporation) that changes color according to the temperature to the surface and observing the change in color. The temperature of the surface of the layer.

<第2金屬層形成製程> 接著,利用輥式層壓對種子層上貼合乾膜抗蝕劑(Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.製、產品名 Photec RY-3525)而使形成有圖案之覆膜機黏結,並使用ORC MANUFACTURING CO.,LTD.製EXM-1201型曝光機,以100mJ/cm2 的能量進行了曝光。接著,用30℃的1質量%碳酸鈉水溶液進行90秒鐘的噴射顯影而使乾膜抗蝕劑開口。接著,使用電解銅電鍍法,於乾膜抗蝕劑上及乾膜抗蝕劑所開口之部分的種子層上形成了厚度7μm的銅電鍍層。接著,使用剝離液剝離了乾膜抗蝕劑。接著使用蝕刻液去除乾膜抗蝕劑被剝離之部分的種子層(300nm的Cu層)而於硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的表面形成了被圖案化之金屬層。<Second metal layer formation process> Next, a dry film resist (manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd., product name Photec RY-3525) is applied to the seed layer by roll lamination to form a patterned coating The film machine was bonded and exposed with an EXM-1201 exposure machine manufactured by ORC MANUFACTURING CO., LTD. with an energy of 100mJ/cm 2. Next, spray development was performed for 90 seconds with a 1% by mass sodium carbonate aqueous solution at 30° C. to open the dry film resist. Next, an electrolytic copper plating method was used to form a copper plating layer with a thickness of 7 μm on the dry film resist and on the seed layer of the part where the dry film resist opened. Next, the dry film resist was peeled off using a peeling liquid. Then, an etching solution was used to remove the seed layer (300 nm Cu layer) of the part where the dry film resist was stripped, and a patterned metal layer was formed on the surface of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process.

<硬化膜的特性> <<玻璃化轉變溫度的測定>> 關於硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層(硬化膜),使用以下方法進行了玻璃化轉變溫度的測定。 安裝動態黏彈性測定裝置,利用拉伸法,以頻率1Hz,並以升溫速度10℃/分鐘從0℃升溫至350℃而依tanδ的峰值溫度求出了Tg。 將所得到之結果記載於下述表1。<Characteristics of Cured Film> <<Measurement of Glass Transition Temperature>> About the photosensitive resin composition layer (cured film) after the curing process, the glass transition temperature was measured using the following method. A dynamic viscoelasticity measuring device was installed, and the Tg was determined from the peak temperature of tanδ by heating from 0°C to 350°C at a frequency of 1 Hz and a heating rate of 10°C/min using the stretching method. The obtained results are described in Table 1 below.

<<應力的測定>> 關於金屬層形成製程及第2金屬層形成製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層(硬化膜),使用以下方法進行了應力測定。 關於感光性樹脂組成物層的塗佈前的矽晶圓,對薄膜應力測定裝置安裝晶圓,於室溫下進行雷射掃描而求出了空白數值。 於薄膜應力測定裝置安裝形成有金屬層形成製程及第2金屬層形成製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層(硬化膜)之晶圓,於室溫下進行雷射掃描後,與感光性樹脂組成物層的塗佈前的空白數值進行比較而依膜厚及曲率半徑而測定了應力。 將所得到之結果記載於下述表1。<<Measurement of stress>> Regarding the photosensitive resin composition layer (cured film) after the metal layer formation process and the second metal layer formation process, the stress was measured using the following method. Regarding the silicon wafer before the coating of the photosensitive resin composition layer, the wafer was mounted on a thin film stress measuring device, and a laser scan was performed at room temperature to obtain a blank value. Mount the wafer with the photosensitive resin composition layer (cured film) formed after the metal layer formation process and the second metal layer formation process in the thin film stress measuring device, and after laser scanning at room temperature, it is combined with the photosensitive resin The blank value before coating of the object layer was compared, and the stress was measured according to the film thickness and the radius of curvature. The obtained results are described in Table 1 below.

<積層製程> 進而,對因金屬層和硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層而形成有凹凸之面,再次使用相同的感光性樹脂組成物並以與上述相同的方式再次實施感光性樹脂組成物的過濾製程至硬化製程的流程而形成了具有2層硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層之積層體。 進而,對具有2層硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層之積層體,以與上述相同的方式再次實施金屬層形成製程及第2金屬層形成製程而形成了積層體。<Laminating process> Furthermore, for the surface with unevenness formed by the metal layer and the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process, the same photosensitive resin composition is used again, and the photosensitive resin composition is implemented again in the same manner as above. From the filtration process to the curing process of the substance, a laminate with two layers of the photosensitive resin composition after the curing process is formed. Furthermore, the laminated body having the photosensitive resin composition layer after the two-layer hardening process was subjected to the metal layer forming process and the second metal layer forming process again in the same manner as described above to form a laminated body.

<積層體的評價> <<金屬針對硬化膜的侵入長度的測定>> 關於金屬層形成製程及第2金屬層形成製程後的積層體,使用以下方法對使用濺射法的金屬層形成製程後的金屬針對硬化膜的侵入長度進行了測定。 藉由聚焦離子束(Focused Ion Beam;FIB)和透射型電子顯微鏡(TEM)對剖面圖進行直接觀察而測定其長度,並同時使用高角度散射暗場掃描透射電子顯微鏡(high-angle annular dark-field scanning transmission electron microscopy;HAADF-STEM)和電子能量損失能譜(Electron Energy Loss Spectroscopy;EELS)進行了元素分析。 將所得到之結果記載於下述表1。<Evaluation of the laminate> <<Measurement of the penetration length of the metal into the cured film>> Regarding the laminate after the metal layer formation process and the second metal layer formation process, use the following method to apply the following method to the metal layer formation process using the sputtering method The penetration length of the metal to the cured film was measured. Through the focused ion beam (Focused Ion Beam; FIB) and transmission electron microscope (TEM) to directly observe the profile to determine its length, and at the same time using a high-angle scattering dark-field scanning transmission electron microscope (high-angle annular dark- Field scanning transmission electron microscopy; HAADF-STEM) and electron energy loss spectroscopy (Electron Energy Loss Spectroscopy; EELS) were analyzed. The obtained results are described in Table 1 below.

<<循環試驗後的剝離試驗>> 使用以下方法對積層製程後的積層體進行了循環試驗後的剝離試驗。 將於氮中-55℃下對各積層體進行30分鐘的冷卻之後,以於125℃下加熱30分鐘的循環進行了500循環。然後,將各積層體以相對於硬化膜的面呈垂直的方向成為寬度5mm的方式切取,並且分別切取硬化膜與金屬層相接的部分及金屬層與第2金屬層相接的部分,觀察其截面,並用光學顯微鏡確認了一個切片於硬化膜與金屬層之間及金屬層與第2金屬層之間有無剝離。「無剝離」為較佳。 將所得到之結果記載於下述表1。<<Peel test after cycle test>> The layered body after the lamination process was subjected to a peel test after the cycle test using the following method. After cooling each layered body at -55°C in nitrogen for 30 minutes, 500 cycles were performed in a cycle of heating at 125°C for 30 minutes. Then, each laminate was cut out in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the cured film to have a width of 5 mm, and the part where the cured film and the metal layer were in contact and the part where the metal layer and the second metal layer were in contact were cut out, and observed It was cross-sectioned and confirmed with an optical microscope whether one slice was peeled between the cured film and the metal layer and between the metal layer and the second metal layer. "No peeling" is preferable. The obtained results are described in Table 1 below.

[實施例2~6及比較例1~3] 變更為下述表中所示之條件,除此以外,以與實施例1相同的方式製造了實施例2~6及比較例1~3的積層體。 以與實施例1相同的方式進行了硬化膜的特性的測定及積層體的評價。[Examples 2 to 6 and Comparative Examples 1 to 3] Except for changing the conditions shown in the following table, in the same manner as in Example 1, Examples 2 to 6 and Comparative Examples 1 to 3 were produced Layered body. In the same manner as in Example 1, the measurement of the characteristics of the cured film and the evaluation of the laminate were performed.

[表1]

Figure 106118059-A0304-0001
[Table 1]
Figure 106118059-A0304-0001

藉由上述表1,得知形成金屬層時的硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的溫度低於硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的玻璃化轉變溫度時,硬化膜的殘留應力較小,能夠提供使用濺射法之金屬層形成製程後的金屬的侵入長度較短之積層體。得知於硬化膜的殘留應力較小,金屬的侵入長度較短之本發明的積層體中,能夠抑制積層有基板、硬化膜及金屬層時的層間剝離。 另一方面,藉由比較例1~3,形成金屬層時的硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的溫度是硬化製程後的感光性樹脂組成物層的玻璃化轉變溫度以上時,硬化膜的殘留應力較大,得到了使用濺射法之金屬層形成製程後的金屬的侵入長度較長之積層體。得知硬化膜的殘留應力較大,且金屬的侵入長度較長之比較例1~3的積層體中,於積層有基板、硬化膜及金屬層時產生層間剝離。From Table 1 above, it can be seen that when the temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process when forming the metal layer is lower than the glass transition temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process, the residual stress of the cured film is lower It is small and can provide a laminate with a short metal penetration length after the metal layer formation process using the sputtering method. It is understood that in the laminate of the present invention in which the residual stress of the cured film is small and the penetration length of the metal is short, it is possible to suppress delamination when the substrate, the cured film, and the metal layer are laminated. On the other hand, according to Comparative Examples 1 to 3, when the temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process when forming the metal layer is higher than the glass transition temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process, the cured film The residual stress is large, and a laminate with a long metal penetration length after the metal layer formation process using the sputtering method is obtained. It was found that in the laminates of Comparative Examples 1 to 3 in which the residual stress of the cured film was large and the penetration length of the metal was long, delamination occurred when the substrate, the cured film, and the metal layer were laminated.

實施例1中,將金屬層(銅薄膜)變更為鋁薄膜,除此以外,以與其他方式相同的方式進行,其結果得到了與實施例1相同的良好的結果。 實施例1中,不改變感光性樹脂組成物1的固體成分濃度的組成比而設為1/10,使用噴槍(澳大利亞EV Group, ALL製「NanoSpray」)進行了噴塗,除此以外,以與實施例1相同的方式形成了積層體。得到了與實施例1相同的優異的效果。 實施例1的積層體的製造中,於230℃下進行3小時的加熱之前,於100℃下加熱(前處理)10分鐘,除此以外,以與實施例1相同的方式製造積層體,並對其特性進行了評價。得到了與實施例1相同的優異的效果。 實施例1的積層體的製造中,於230℃下進行3小時的加熱之前,於150℃下加熱(前處理)10分鐘,除此以外,以與實施例1相同的方式製造積層體,並對其特性進行了評價。得到了與實施例1相同的優異的效果。 實施例1的積層體的製造中,於230℃下加熱3小時之前照射UV光的同時於180℃下加熱(前處理)10分鐘,除此以外,以與實施例1相同的方式製造積層體,並對其特性進行了評價。得到了與實施例1相同的優異的效果。 [產業上的可利用性]In Example 1, the metal layer (copper thin film) was changed to an aluminum thin film, and it was performed in the same manner as the other methods. As a result, the same good results as in Example 1 were obtained. In Example 1, the composition ratio of the solid content concentration of the photosensitive resin composition 1 was set to 1/10 without changing the composition ratio, and spraying was performed using a spray gun ("NanoSpray" made by EV Group, ALL, Australia). The laminated body was formed in the same manner as in Example 1. The same excellent effect as in Example 1 was obtained. In the production of the laminate of Example 1, before heating at 230°C for 3 hours, heating (pretreatment) at 100°C for 10 minutes, except that the laminate was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, and The characteristics were evaluated. The same excellent effect as in Example 1 was obtained. In the production of the laminate of Example 1, before heating at 230°C for 3 hours, heating (pretreatment) at 150°C for 10 minutes, except that the laminate was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, and The characteristics were evaluated. The same excellent effect as in Example 1 was obtained. In the production of the laminated body of Example 1, the laminated body was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, except that UV light was irradiated at 230°C for 3 hours before heating (pretreatment) at 180°C for 10 minutes. , And evaluated its characteristics. The same excellent effect as in Example 1 was obtained. [Industrial availability]

本發明的積層體的製造方法中所製造之積層體中,能夠抑制積層有基板、硬化膜及金屬層時的層間剝離。進而藉由本發明的積層體的製造方法而製造之積層體中,即使積層有兩組以上的基板、硬化膜及金屬層的積層體之情況下,亦能夠抑制層間剝離。該種積層體能夠用作製造半導體元件的再配線層用層間絕緣層,並能夠提供層間剝離得到抑制之再配線層用層間絕緣層。又,該種積層體能夠用作製造功率半導體用途的層間絕緣層、三維IC(Three-Dimensional Integrated Circuit)用銅柱中膜或單層絕緣層及面板用途的層間絕緣層。In the laminate produced by the method of producing the laminate of the present invention, it is possible to suppress delamination when the substrate, the cured film, and the metal layer are laminated. Furthermore, in the laminated body manufactured by the manufacturing method of the laminated body of this invention, even when the laminated body which laminated|stacked two or more sets of a board|substrate, a cured film, and a metal layer, peeling between layers can be suppressed. Such a laminate can be used as an interlayer insulating layer for a rewiring layer for manufacturing semiconductor elements, and can provide an interlayer insulating layer for a rewiring layer in which delamination is suppressed. In addition, this type of laminate can be used as an interlayer insulating layer for the manufacture of power semiconductors, a copper pillar intermediate film for three-dimensional IC (Three-Dimensional Integrated Circuit), a single-layer insulating layer, and an interlayer insulating layer for panel applications.

100‧‧‧半導體元件101、101a~101d‧‧‧半導體晶片102b、102c、102d‧‧‧貫通電極103a~103e‧‧‧金屬凸塊105‧‧‧再配線層110、110a、110b‧‧‧底部填充層115‧‧‧絕緣層120‧‧‧配線基板120a‧‧‧表面電極200‧‧‧積層體201‧‧‧感光性樹脂組成物層(硬化膜)203‧‧‧金屬層100‧‧‧Semiconductor element 101, 101a~101d‧‧‧Semiconductor chip 102b, 102c, 102d‧‧‧ Through electrode 103a~103e‧‧‧Metal bump 105‧‧‧Rewiring layer 110, 110a, 110b‧‧‧ Underfill layer 115‧‧‧Insulation layer 120‧‧‧Wiring substrate 120a‧‧‧Surface electrode 200‧‧‧Laminate 201‧‧‧Photosensitive resin composition layer (hardened film) 203‧‧‧Metal layer

100:半導體元件 100: Semiconductor components

101、101a~101d:半導體晶片 101, 101a~101d: semiconductor wafer

102b、102c、102d:貫通電極 102b, 102c, 102d: through electrode

103a~103e:金屬凸塊 103a~103e: Metal bump

105:再配線層 105: redistribution layer

110、110a、110b:底部填充層 110, 110a, 110b: underfill layer

115:絕緣層 115: insulating layer

120:配線基板 120: Wiring board

120a:表面電極 120a: Surface electrode

Claims (12)

一種積層體的製造方法,其包括依序進行之如下製程:感光性樹脂組成物層形成製程,將感光性樹脂組成物應用於基板而形成為層狀;曝光製程,對應用於前述基板之感光性樹脂組成物層進行曝光;顯影處理製程,對所曝光之前述感光性樹脂組成物層進行顯影處理;硬化製程,對顯影後的前述感光性樹脂組成物層進行硬化;以及金屬層形成製程,藉由氣相成膜於前述硬化製程後的前述感光性樹脂組成物層的表面形成金屬層;並且形成前述金屬層時的前述硬化製程後的前述感光性樹脂組成物層的溫度低於前述硬化製程後的前述感光性樹脂組成物層的玻璃化轉變溫度,前述硬化製程包括對前述感光性樹脂組成物層進行升溫之升溫製程和以與前述升溫製程的最終到達溫度相等之保持溫度進行保持之保持製程,前述保持製程中的前述保持溫度為250℃以下。 A method for manufacturing a laminated body includes the following processes in sequence: a photosensitive resin composition layer forming process, applying the photosensitive resin composition to a substrate to form a layer; an exposure process corresponding to the photosensitive resin composition used for the aforementioned substrate The photosensitive resin composition layer is exposed; the development process is to develop the exposed photosensitive resin composition layer; the curing process is to harden the developed photosensitive resin composition layer; and the metal layer formation process, A metal layer is formed on the surface of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process by vapor phase film formation; and the temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the curing process when the metal layer is formed is lower than the curing process The glass transition temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer after the process. The curing process includes a temperature-rising process of raising the temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer and maintaining a holding temperature equal to the final temperature of the aforementioned temperature-rising process. The holding process, the holding temperature in the holding process is 250° C. or lower. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之積層體的製造方法,其還包括再次依序進行之前述感光性樹脂組成物層形成製程、前述曝光製程、前述顯影處理製程、前述硬化製程及前述金屬層形成製程。 The manufacturing method of the laminated body as described in the first item of the patent application, which further includes the aforementioned photosensitive resin composition layer forming process, the aforementioned exposure process, the aforementioned development treatment process, the aforementioned curing process, and the aforementioned metal layer which are carried out in sequence again Formation process. 如申請專利範圍第1項或第2項所述之積層體的製造方法,其中前述感光性樹脂組成物藉由曝光構建交聯結構而針對有機溶劑的溶解度降低。 The method for manufacturing a laminate as described in claim 1 or 2, wherein the photosensitive resin composition constructs a cross-linked structure by exposure to reduce solubility in organic solvents. 如申請專利範圍第1項或第2項所述之積層體的製造方法,其中 前述感光性樹脂組成物包括選自聚醯亞胺前驅物、聚醯亞胺、聚苯并噁唑前驅物及聚苯并噁唑中之至少一種樹脂。 The method of manufacturing a laminate as described in item 1 or item 2 of the scope of the patent application, wherein The aforementioned photosensitive resin composition includes at least one resin selected from the group consisting of a polyimide precursor, a polyimide, a polybenzoxazole precursor, and a polybenzoxazole. 如申請專利範圍第1項或第2項所述之積層體的製造方法,其還包括第2金屬層形成製程,於前述金屬層的表面形成第2金屬層。 The method for manufacturing a laminate as described in item 1 or item 2 of the scope of the patent application further includes a second metal layer forming process to form a second metal layer on the surface of the metal layer. 如申請專利範圍第5項所述之積層體的製造方法,其中前述第2金屬層包括銅。 The method for manufacturing a laminate as described in claim 5, wherein the second metal layer includes copper. 如申請專利範圍第1項或第2項所述之積層體的製造方法,其中前述金屬層包含如下化合物中的至少一種,該化合物包含鈦、鉭及銅以及它們中的至少一種。 According to the method for manufacturing a laminate as described in item 1 or item 2, the aforementioned metal layer includes at least one of the following compounds, and the compound includes at least one of titanium, tantalum, and copper. 如申請專利範圍第1項或第2項所述之積層體的製造方法,其中於前述金屬層形成製程中形成之前述金屬層的厚度為50~2000nm。 According to the method for manufacturing a laminated body described in item 1 or item 2 of the scope of the patent application, the thickness of the metal layer formed in the metal layer forming process is 50 to 2000 nm. 如申請專利範圍第1項或第2項所述之積層體的製造方法,其中依照雷射測量法測定之前述硬化製程後的前述感光性樹脂組成物的殘留應力小於35MPa。 The method for manufacturing a laminate as described in item 1 or item 2 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the residual stress of the photosensitive resin composition after the curing process measured according to the laser measurement method is less than 35 MPa. 如申請專利範圍第1項或第2項所述之積層體的製造方法,其中前述感光性樹脂組成物為負型顯影用感光性樹脂組成物。 The method for producing a laminate as described in the first or second patent application, wherein the photosensitive resin composition is a photosensitive resin composition for negative development. 如申請專利範圍第1項或第2項所述之積層體的製造方法,其中形成前述金屬層時的前述感光性樹脂組成物層的溫度比前述感光性樹脂組成物層的玻璃化轉變溫度低30℃以上。 The method for manufacturing a laminate as described in item 1 or item 2 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer when the metal layer is formed is lower than the glass transition temperature of the photosensitive resin composition layer Above 30°C. 一種半導體元件的製造方法,其包括如申請專利範圍第1項至第11項中任一項所述之積層體的製造方法。 A method for manufacturing a semiconductor element includes the method for manufacturing a laminated body as described in any one of items 1 to 11 in the scope of the patent application.
TW106118059A 2016-06-02 2017-06-01 Manufacturing method of laminated body and manufacturing method of semiconductor element TWI736629B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2016111113 2016-06-02
JP2016-111113 2016-06-02

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW201835226A TW201835226A (en) 2018-10-01
TWI736629B true TWI736629B (en) 2021-08-21

Family

ID=60478680

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW106118059A TWI736629B (en) 2016-06-02 2017-06-01 Manufacturing method of laminated body and manufacturing method of semiconductor element

Country Status (5)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6845848B2 (en)
KR (1) KR102147108B1 (en)
CN (1) CN109313397B (en)
TW (1) TWI736629B (en)
WO (1) WO2017209176A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP7169844B2 (en) * 2017-12-15 2022-11-11 旭化成株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured relief pattern, and semiconductor device
JP7187883B2 (en) * 2018-08-09 2022-12-13 大日本印刷株式会社 Evaporation mask manufacturing method
WO2020080216A1 (en) * 2018-10-19 2020-04-23 富士フイルム株式会社 Cured film production method, resin composition, cured film, laminate body production method, and semiconductor device manufacturing method
WO2020116238A1 (en) * 2018-12-05 2020-06-11 富士フイルム株式会社 Pattern forming method, photosensitive resin composition, cured film, laminate, and device
CN110571156B (en) * 2019-08-01 2021-05-04 广东芯华微电子技术有限公司 Manufacturing method of board-level fan-out type packaging fine circuit
TW202112837A (en) 2019-09-26 2021-04-01 日商富士軟片股份有限公司 Heat-conducting layer production method, laminate production method, and semiconductor device production method
JPWO2022064933A1 (en) * 2020-09-24 2022-03-31
TW202307090A (en) * 2021-05-17 2023-02-16 日商富士軟片股份有限公司 Composition for forming polyimide-containing part, joined body manufacturing method, joined body, device manufacturing method and device
JP7354479B1 (en) 2021-12-23 2023-10-02 富士フイルム株式会社 Method for manufacturing a bonded body, method for manufacturing a bonded body, a laminate, a method for manufacturing a laminate, a device, a device, and a composition for forming a polyimide-containing precursor portion

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000343031A (en) * 1999-06-08 2000-12-12 Toray Ind Inc Resin applying method
CN1666580A (en) * 2002-09-12 2005-09-07 先锋株式会社 Organic electroluminescence display and its manufacturing method
CN103097420A (en) * 2010-09-02 2013-05-08 默克专利股份有限公司 Interlayer for electronic devices

Family Cites Families (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000026722A (en) * 1998-07-13 2000-01-25 Hitachi Ltd Polyimide precursor-containing resin composition, and positive type photosensitive resin composition and electronic device using the same and pattern formation of the same
DE10011604A1 (en) * 2000-03-10 2001-10-04 Infineon Technologies Ag Polybenzoxazole precursors
US20060292383A1 (en) * 2003-11-26 2006-12-28 Shuichi Kohayashi Metal-coated substrate and manufacturing method of the same
JP2008222937A (en) * 2007-03-14 2008-09-25 Jsr Corp Polymer and photosensitive resin composition using the same
JP2008307737A (en) * 2007-06-13 2008-12-25 Mitsui Chemicals Inc Laminate, wiring board and its manufacturing method
JP5251211B2 (en) * 2008-03-31 2013-07-31 大日本印刷株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition and pattern forming method
JP2010008603A (en) * 2008-06-25 2010-01-14 Jsr Corp Radiation sensitive resin composition for forming wiring partition, wiring partition, and its forming method
KR101010036B1 (en) * 2009-08-28 2011-01-21 주식회사 엘지화학 New polyamic acid, polyimide, photosensitive resin composition comprising the same and dry film manufactured by the same
JPWO2011034092A1 (en) 2009-09-18 2013-02-14 株式会社アルバック Formation method of barrier metal film
JP5208085B2 (en) * 2009-10-14 2013-06-12 日東電工株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing circuit board with metal support using the same, and circuit board with metal support
JP2013087264A (en) * 2011-10-21 2013-05-13 Sumitomo Chemical Co Ltd Method for producing laminate, laminate, and circuit board
JP2015207284A (en) * 2014-04-10 2015-11-19 富士フイルム株式会社 Pattern forming method, cured product, method for manufacturing touch panel or display panel, and display device

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000343031A (en) * 1999-06-08 2000-12-12 Toray Ind Inc Resin applying method
CN1666580A (en) * 2002-09-12 2005-09-07 先锋株式会社 Organic electroluminescence display and its manufacturing method
CN103097420A (en) * 2010-09-02 2013-05-08 默克专利股份有限公司 Interlayer for electronic devices

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN109313397A (en) 2019-02-05
KR20180135070A (en) 2018-12-19
WO2017209176A1 (en) 2017-12-07
TW201835226A (en) 2018-10-01
KR102147108B1 (en) 2020-08-25
JPWO2017209176A1 (en) 2019-05-23
CN109313397B (en) 2023-04-11
JP6845848B2 (en) 2021-03-24

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI736629B (en) Manufacturing method of laminated body and manufacturing method of semiconductor element
TWI830588B (en) Photosensitive resin composition, cured film, laminated body, manufacturing method of cured film, laminated body manufacturing method, and semiconductor element
TWI758415B (en) Photosensitive resin composition, heterocyclic ring-containing polymer precursor, cured film, laminate, manufacturing method of cured film, and semiconductor device
TWI751190B (en) Photosensitive resin composition and its application
TWI625232B (en) Laminated body, manufacturing method of laminated body, semiconductor element, and manufacturing method of semiconductor element
TWI728137B (en) Negative photosensitive resin composition, cured film, cured film manufacturing method, semiconductor device, laminated body manufacturing method, semiconductor device manufacturing method, and polyimide precursor
JP6650517B2 (en) Method for producing cured film, method for producing laminate, and method for producing semiconductor element
TWI709817B (en) Pattern manufacturing method, semiconductor device manufacturing method, and laminate
TWI732893B (en) Negative photosensitive resin composition, cured film, cured film manufacturing method, semiconductor element, laminated body manufacturing method, semiconductor element manufacturing method, and polyimide precursor
TWI751341B (en) Photosensitive resin composition, polymer precursor, cured film, laminate, cured film manufacturing method and semiconductor device
TWI733882B (en) Manufacturing method of laminated body and manufacturing method of electronic component
TWI751252B (en) Photosensitive resin composition, cured film, laminate, cured film manufacturing method, laminate manufacturing method, and semiconductor device
JP6901596B2 (en) Manufacturing method of laminate and manufacturing method of semiconductor device
TW202348689A (en) Method for producing film, method for producing laminated body, and method for producing electronic device
JP7196121B2 (en) Pattern forming method, photosensitive resin composition, laminate manufacturing method, and electronic device manufacturing method
JP7478806B2 (en) Organic film and its manufacturing method, composition, laminate, and semiconductor device
TW202028305A (en) Photosensitive resin composition, pattern forming method, cured film, multilayer body and device